1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8387 \begin_layout Section
8388 Nesting Environments
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 Nesting ! Environments
8399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8408 \begin_layout Subsection
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8414 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8416 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8418 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8420 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Enumerate
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8456 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset space ~
8481 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8483 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 arg "depth-increment"
8512 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8517 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8523 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8524 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8525 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8526 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8529 \begin_layout Standard
8530 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8532 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8534 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8537 \begin_layout Subsection
8538 What You Can and Can't Nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8543 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8548 than a simple yes or no.
8549 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Completely unnestable
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8568 environments have them:
8571 \begin_layout Description
8572 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8573 Can't nest into them.
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Description
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 Nestable You can nest them.
8614 You can nest other things into them.
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Description
8681 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8682 You can't nest anything into them.
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_inset space ~
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Standard
8782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8800 \begin_inset space ~
8803 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8804 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8805 nested section headings violate this.
8813 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8815 \begin_inset Index idx
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8829 affected by nesting anyhow.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8855 Figures and tables in
8859 are not affected by this.
8864 Have a look at section
8865 \begin_inset space ~
8869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8871 reference "sec:Floats"
8875 for more information about
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8885 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8890 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8898 of its own, it behaves just like a
8899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8906 paragraph environment.
8907 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8912 Here's an example with a table:
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 This is (a) and it's nested.
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Tabular
8935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 This is (a) and it's nested.
9054 \begin_layout Standard
9055 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Tabular
9064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9181 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 This is (a) and it's nested.
9193 \begin_layout Standard
9194 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset Tabular
9203 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9204 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9298 \begin_layout Enumerate
9300 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9318 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9319 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9323 \begin_layout Subsection
9324 Usage and General Features
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9329 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9338 is the innermost possible depth.
9339 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 level #1 – outermost
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9377 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9378 both of them in the example.
9379 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9389 For example, if we tried to nest another
9394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9401 , we would get errors.
9404 \begin_layout Subsection
9406 \begin_inset Index idx
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9420 We have several examples of nested environments.
9421 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9426 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #2-a This is level #2.
9443 We created it by using
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-increment"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #3-a This is level #3.
9462 This time, we just enter
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9473 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9477 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9483 arg "depth-increment"
9490 \begin_layout Standard
9495 environment, nested inside of
9496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9504 So, it's at level #4.
9505 We did this by entering
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9517 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9522 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9543 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #4-a This is level #4.
9558 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9561 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9566 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9570 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9575 keep nesting things inside
9576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9597 and this is level #6.
9598 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #5-b Back to level #5.
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9635 , we're back at level #4.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #3-b Back to level #3.
9642 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #2-b Back to level #2.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9656 After this sentence, we will enter
9660 and change the paragraph environment back to
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 We could have also used the
9684 environment in place of the
9689 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9693 Example 2: Inheritance
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9697 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9709 arg "depth-increment"
9713 \begin_inset Newline newline
9716 which, we will change to the
9724 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 environment, at level #2.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 Notice how the nested
9737 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9741 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 We ended this example by entering
9751 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9755 and reset the nesting depth by using
9758 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9765 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9774 \begin_inset Argument 1
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9778 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 This is level #1, in an
9791 paragraph environment.
9792 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9801 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 arg "depth-increment"
9811 Now, what happens if we nest an
9815 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9816 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_layout Itemize
9830 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9831 So, its label is a bullet.
9832 (We got here by using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9844 , then changing the environment to
9852 \begin_layout Itemize
9853 Here's level #4, produced using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9879 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9883 , because we are in the
9891 environment (that is, it is an
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9912 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 to decrease the depth after the next
9936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9953 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9967 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9972 reset the counter for the label.
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-decrement"
9989 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9990 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9991 into the twofold-nested
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The same thing happens if we do another
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-decrement"
10012 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Standard
10016 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10021 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10032 The number of other
10036 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 The same rule applies for the
10047 environment, as well.
10050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10051 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10055 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10056 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10057 the same detail with how we did it.
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10074 arg "depth-increment"
10081 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10082 the example in parentheses someplace.
10083 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10084 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10085 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Now we will add verse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 It will get much worse.
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10130 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10144 \begin_layout Verse
10145 Here comes a table:
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10158 \begin_inset Tabular
10159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "depth-decrement"
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 : level #1) This is another item.
10294 Note that selecting a
10298 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10299 3 times to put the table inside the
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We're now ending the
10312 list and changing to
10317 We're still at level #1.
10318 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10319 The next set of paragraphs is a
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10327 We will nest both the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10339 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10343 for the letter body.
10347 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10350 to preserve the depth.
10351 Remember that you need to use
10354 arg "newline-insert newline"
10357 to create multiple lines inside the
10364 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Right Address
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10379 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 \begin_layout Address
10388 \begin_inset space ~
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10399 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10400 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10401 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10402 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10403 as soon as possible.
10404 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10409 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10410 with your order, along with payment.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We thank you again for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_layout Quotation
10427 That ends that example!
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10432 gives you a lot of power with just
10434 We could have easily nested an
10455 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10458 \begin_layout Subsection
10460 \begin_inset Index idx
10463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 Nesting ! Separation
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10472 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10482 For example you need two different enumerations:
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator plain
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Enumerate
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10533 list item and use the menu
10535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Start New Environment
10539 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10540 ) and behind it the new list.
10543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Start New Parent Environment
10546 only appears if the item is nested.
10547 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10553 (red arrow in LyX).
10554 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10555 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10569 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10572 \begin_layout Section
10573 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10574 \begin_inset Index idx
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10588 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10590 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10591 be broken at the end of a line.
10592 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10596 \begin_layout Subsection
10598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10600 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10617 \begin_layout Standard
10618 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10619 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10620 ) not to break the line at
10622 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10626 Further documentation is given in section
10627 \begin_inset Newline newline
10631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10633 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10657 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10666 A protected space is set with
10668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10685 \begin_layout Subsection
10687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10689 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10694 \begin_inset Index idx
10697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 Spacing ! Horizontal
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10714 The length units are listed in Appendix
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10732 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10737 \begin_inset Index idx
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 Spaces ! Inter-word
10749 \begin_layout Standard
10750 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10751 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10752 at the ends of sentences.
10753 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10754 automatically takes care about this.
10755 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10756 followed by a period; see section
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10763 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10768 To insert a normal space, select
10770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10781 arg "space-insert normal"
10787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10791 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10796 \begin_inset Index idx
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10827 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10828 inside abbreviations:
10831 \begin_layout Quote
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 or between values and units.
10842 Compare for example this:
10843 \begin_inset Newline newline
10847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 \begin_inset Newline newline
10854 10 kg (normal space
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert thin"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_layout Standard
10882 You can also insert the following space types:
10885 \begin_layout Description
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10894 space A line with a
10895 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10899 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10906 negative thin space between the arrows.
10909 \begin_layout Description
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10918 space A line with a
10919 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10923 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10930 negative medium space between the arrows.
10933 \begin_layout Description
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10942 space A line with a
10943 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10947 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 negative thick space between the arrows.
10957 \begin_layout Description
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10971 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10975 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 em) space between the arrows.
10989 \begin_layout Description
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11003 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 em) space between the arrows.
11021 \begin_layout Description
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 em) space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 cm space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11086 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 lists the different space sizes.
11093 \begin_layout Standard
11094 \begin_inset Float table
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11109 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11119 \begin_inset Tabular
11120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset Index idx
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11412 feature for adding extra space
11413 in a uniform fashion.
11414 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11415 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11416 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11417 equally between themselves.
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11424 \begin_layout Quote
11426 This is on the left side
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 This is on the right
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_layout Quote
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 That was an example in the
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 is one in a standard paragraph.
11482 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11486 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11498 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11503 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11527 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11563 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11567 \begin_inset space ~
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11586 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11588 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11589 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11593 option in the space dialog.
11601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11605 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11624 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11631 What is correct English?:
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11643 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11699 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11706 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11733 That is why it is named
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11743 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11780 There you find the following sizes:
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11796 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11802 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11817 Document ! Settings
11822 for the paragraph separation.
11823 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Index idx
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11850 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11855 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11856 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11865 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 s are described in section
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11881 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11890 If there are several
11894 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11895 You can therefore use
11899 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11907 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11914 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11933 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11945 \begin_layout Subsection
11946 Paragraph Alignment
11947 \begin_inset Index idx
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 Paragraph ! Alignment
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11965 dialog (toolbar button
11968 arg "layout-paragraph"
11972 There are five possibilities:
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12047 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12048 the left and right margins.
12049 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 This paragraph is right aligned,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is centered,
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12064 this one is left aligned.
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Page breaks ! Forced
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12081 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12089 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12091 force a page break where you want one.
12092 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 is good at page breaking.
12094 Only if you use a lot of
12098 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12104 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12108 have to change the page breaking.
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12114 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12135 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12137 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12138 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12143 at the top of a page.
12144 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12146 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12147 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12148 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12152 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12156 to learn more about
12163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12167 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12172 \begin_inset Index idx
12175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12176 Page breaks ! Clear
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12186 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12187 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12188 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12189 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12204 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12218 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12219 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12222 \begin_layout Subsection
12224 \begin_inset Index idx
12227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12246 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert newline"
12267 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12284 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12287 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12289 This is useful to avoid
12290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12297 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 very good at line breaking.
12305 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12306 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12313 reference "sec:Quote"
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Verse"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12338 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 \begin_inset space ~
12380 you can insert horizontal lines.
12381 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12382 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12383 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12399 \begin_layout Section
12400 Characters and Symbols
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12405 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12406 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12418 for information on how this is done.
12421 \begin_layout Standard
12422 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12427 dialog via the menu
12429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12446 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12448 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12456 \begin_layout Section
12457 Fonts and Text Styles
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12460 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12467 \begin_layout Subsection
12469 \begin_inset Index idx
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of fonts:
12485 \begin_layout Description
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12505 characters) in the font.
12506 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12507 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12508 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12509 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12510 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12511 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12512 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12513 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12517 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12518 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12519 sizes than at small ones.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_layout Description
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12558 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12559 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12560 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12561 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12562 image manipulation program.
12563 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12564 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels high up to 34
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12572 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12573 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12574 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12576 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12577 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12578 \begin_inset Newline newline
12581 Bitmap fonts are named
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12589 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12593 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12594 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12595 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12596 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12597 use scalable fonts.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12606 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12607 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12608 font to emphasize text, you use an
12609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12617 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12619 In \SpecialChar LyX
12620 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12629 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12637 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 used its own fonts.
12639 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12640 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12645 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12646 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12647 to a word processor.
12648 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12649 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 files are very portable across
12651 different machines.
12652 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 has increased a lot
12654 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12657 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12665 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12670 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 code in the document
12672 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12677 engines that are also able directly
12678 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12680 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12682 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12684 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12685 that is installed on your system.
12686 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12699 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12707 \begin_layout Subsection
12708 Document Font and Font size
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12711 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 You can set the document fonts in the
12741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_inset Index idx
12748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 Document ! Settings
12759 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12760 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12772 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12777 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12785 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12786 This requires that you use
12798 as the output format, i.
12799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12803 \begin_inset space \space{}
12806 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12807 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12808 installed (see section
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12820 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12823 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12828 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12829 cannot determine the family.
12830 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12831 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12834 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12839 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12844 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12850 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12851 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12891 European Computer Modern
12894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12902 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12910 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12911 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12916 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12924 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12930 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12931 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12934 \begin_layout Itemize
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12943 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12962 community in order to replace
12966 as the default font.
12967 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12968 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 One difference is improved kerning.
12993 \begin_layout Itemize
12994 If you do not like the look of
13002 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13023 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13027 serif and typewriter fonts,
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13032 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13039 \begin_inset space ~
13048 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13053 \begin_inset space \space{}
13061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13065 \begin_inset space \space{}
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13089 but you can also select your own.
13090 \begin_inset Newline newline
13093 The differences between roman,
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13105 fonts are explained in section
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13112 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13117 \begin_inset Newline newline
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13128 was originally designed for newspapers.
13129 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13130 into the small newspaper columns.
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13139 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13156 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13161 depends on the class you are using.
13162 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13166 Note that the font size is the
13171 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13172 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13173 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13174 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13177 \begin_inset space ~
13183 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13190 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13197 \begin_layout Standard
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13206 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13211 serif or typewriter.
13216 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13226 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13234 LaTeX font encoding
13236 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13237 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13243 \begin_inset Index idx
13246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13260 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13265 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13266 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13274 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13276 Use Old Style Figures
13280 Use True Small Caps
13283 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13286 Use Old Style Figures
13288 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13290 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13298 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13302 Use True Small Caps
13304 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13305 of scaled capitals.
13306 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13307 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13310 \begin_layout Standard
13315 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13316 a font to display the script characters.
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13321 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13327 \begin_inset Index idx
13330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13337 So this has no effect for the document language
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13356 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13358 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13359 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13365 \begin_inset Index idx
13368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13370 packages ! microtype
13378 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13380 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13383 \begin_layout Standard
13384 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13396 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13401 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13402 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13404 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13409 dialog, see section
13410 \begin_inset space ~
13414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13416 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13428 \begin_layout Subsection
13432 \begin_layout Standard
13433 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13434 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13436 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13437 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13438 choose a math font in the dialog
13440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 Document ! Settings
13454 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13455 automatically selects a math font.
13456 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13457 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13466 \begin_inset space ~
13472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13477 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13478 document font is available.
13481 \begin_layout Standard
13482 Note that the math font will not be used for
13486 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13492 or by the insertion of the command
13499 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13500 \begin_inset space ~
13504 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13505 while the math characters do not.
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13510 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13526 in the document font settings.
13529 \begin_layout Standard
13530 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13532 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13533 font (in most cases
13534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13540 \begin_inset space ~
13546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13549 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13550 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13558 \begin_inset space ~
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13570 \begin_layout Subsection
13571 Using Different Character Styles
13572 \begin_inset Index idx
13575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13582 \begin_inset Index idx
13585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13594 \begin_layout Standard
13595 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13596 automatically changes the character style for certain
13597 paragraph environments.
13599 supports two character styles,
13608 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13617 style, do one of the following:
13620 \begin_layout Itemize
13621 click on the toolbar button
13630 \begin_layout Itemize
13631 use the key binding
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13641 These commands are all toggles.
13646 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13649 \begin_layout Standard
13650 One typically uses the
13654 style for proper names.
13656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13663 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13671 \begin_layout Standard
13672 A more widely used character style is the
13677 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13684 \begin_layout Itemize
13685 clicking on the toolbar button
13694 \begin_layout Itemize
13695 using the keybindings
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13709 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13711 use a different font.
13714 \begin_layout Standard
13715 We've been using the
13719 style all over the place in this document.
13720 Here's one more example:
13723 \begin_layout Quotation
13726 Do not overuse character styles!
13729 \begin_layout Standard
13730 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13731 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13732 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13733 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13746 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13748 \begin_inset space ~
13751 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13757 arg "dialog-show character"
13763 \begin_layout Subsection
13764 Fine-Tuning with the
13769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13771 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13776 \begin_inset Index idx
13779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13789 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13791 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13792 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13793 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13794 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13795 from ordinary dialog.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13800 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13801 \begin_inset Newline newline
13804 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13805 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 To use custom character styles, open the
13811 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13816 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13819 dialog or press the toolbar button
13822 arg "dialog-show character"
13826 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13827 font property that you can choose.
13828 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13836 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13841 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13842 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13843 environments all at once.
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13847 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13850 \begin_inset space ~
13862 \begin_layout Labeling
13863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13877 The possible options are:
13881 \begin_layout Labeling
13882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13887 This is the Roman font family.
13888 Normally a serif font.
13889 It's also the default family.
13899 \begin_layout Labeling
13900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13904 \begin_inset space ~
13911 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13923 \begin_layout Labeling
13924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13931 This is the Typewriter font family.
13937 arg "font-typewriter"
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13952 This corresponds to the print weight.
13957 \begin_layout Labeling
13958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 This is the Medium font series.
13964 It's also the default series.
13967 \begin_layout Labeling
13968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13975 This is the Bold font series.
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 As the name implies.
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14005 This is the Upright font shape.
14006 It's also the default shape.
14009 \begin_layout Labeling
14010 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14024 s the Italic font shape
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14038 This is the Slanted font shape
14040 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14041 , this is different from italic).
14044 \begin_layout Labeling
14045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14049 \begin_inset space ~
14056 This is the Small caps font shape
14063 \begin_layout Labeling
14064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 Alters the text color.
14070 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14074 \begin_inset space ~
14079 , which means that the document default color set in
14081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14088 \begin_inset space ~
14093 is used, you can choose between
14170 \begin_inset Index idx
14173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14182 \begin_layout Labeling
14183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14188 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14189 the language of the document.
14190 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14191 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14193 \begin_inset Newline newline
14196 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14198 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14199 When using the spell checking (see section
14200 \begin_inset space ~
14204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14206 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14210 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14213 \begin_layout Labeling
14214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14219 Alters the size of the font.
14220 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14221 proportional to the document font size.
14222 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14223 the details, but a general description of what
14229 \begin_layout Labeling
14230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14251 arg "font-size tiny"
14257 \begin_layout Labeling
14258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14279 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14285 \begin_layout Labeling
14286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14307 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size small"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14356 It's also the default size.
14360 arg "font-size normal"
14366 \begin_layout Labeling
14367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14388 arg "font-size large"
14394 \begin_layout Labeling
14395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14416 arg "font-size larger"
14422 \begin_layout Labeling
14423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14444 arg "font-size largest"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size huge"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size giant"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14512 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14532 arg "font-size increase"
14538 \begin_layout Labeling
14539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14544 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14564 arg "font-size decrease"
14571 \begin_layout Standard
14576 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14577 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14579 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14580 — use those instead.
14581 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14584 \begin_layout Labeling
14585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14590 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14595 \begin_layout Labeling
14596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14603 This is text with emphasize on
14606 This might seem like the same as
14610 , but it is actually a bit different.
14616 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14618 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14621 \begin_layout Labeling
14622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14629 This is text with Underbar on.
14635 arg "font-underline"
14641 \begin_inset Newline newline
14646 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14647 when you could not change fonts.
14648 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14649 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14650 because some people
14654 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14657 \begin_layout Labeling
14658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14662 \begin_inset space ~
14669 This is text with Double underbar on.
14675 arg "font-underunderline"
14679 \begin_inset Newline newline
14682 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14683 about double underbar.
14686 \begin_layout Labeling
14687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14691 \begin_inset space ~
14698 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14704 arg "font-underwave"
14708 \begin_inset Newline newline
14711 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14712 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14720 \begin_inset space ~
14727 This is text with Strikeout on.
14733 arg "font-strikeout"
14737 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14741 changed in the meantime.
14744 \begin_layout Labeling
14745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14749 \begin_inset space ~
14756 This is text with Cross out on.
14759 \begin_inset Newline newline
14762 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14765 \begin_layout Labeling
14766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14773 This is text with Noun on.
14780 , this is a logical attribute.
14781 Normally it's equivalent to
14784 \begin_inset space ~
14793 \begin_layout Standard
14794 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14795 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14802 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14808 arg "dialog-show character"
14811 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14812 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14815 arg "textstyle-apply"
14819 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14823 \begin_layout Standard
14824 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14831 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14832 (suppose you just set the shape to
14833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14863 \begin_layout Standard
14864 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14872 \begin_inset space ~
14884 \begin_layout Itemize
14890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14897 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14915 \begin_inset Newline newline
14919 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 \begin_inset Note Note
14936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14937 For more on phantoms see section
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14944 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14954 \begin_inset Newline newline
14960 \begin_layout Itemize
14965 fonts use characters with serifs.
14966 These are the small
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14975 The following example shows the difference:
14976 \begin_inset Newline newline
14980 \begin_inset Newline newline
14985 text without serifs
14988 \begin_inset Newline newline
14991 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14992 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14999 \begin_layout Itemize
15004 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15005 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15006 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15009 \begin_layout Standard
15010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15017 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15018 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15021 \begin_inset space ~
15026 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15027 the property to be removed.
15028 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15029 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15030 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15048 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15049 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15057 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15061 \begin_inset space ~
15066 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 If you, for example, set
15078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15096 \begin_inset space ~
15101 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15113 \begin_layout Standard
15114 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15115 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15118 \begin_layout Section
15119 Printing and Previewing
15122 \begin_layout Subsection
15126 \begin_layout Standard
15127 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15128 using \SpecialChar LyX
15129 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15130 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15131 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15132 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15134 Additional Features
15139 \begin_layout Standard
15141 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15144 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15145 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15146 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15149 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15150 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15151 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15152 to turn your writing into printable output.
15153 This happens in two stages:
15156 \begin_layout Enumerate
15157 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15158 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15160 a file with the extension,
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 \begin_layout Enumerate
15176 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15177 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15178 to use the commands in the
15182 file to produce printable output.
15185 \begin_layout Subsection
15186 Output file formats
15187 \begin_inset Index idx
15190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15199 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15207 Simple text (ASCII)
15208 \begin_inset Index idx
15211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15212 File formats ! ASCII
15220 \begin_layout Standard
15221 This file type has the extension
15222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15245 \begin_layout Standard
15246 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15248 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15249 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15251 \begin_inset space ~
15257 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15258 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15259 bibliography (section
15260 \begin_inset space ~
15264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15266 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15271 If your document includes such material, use
15273 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15274 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15276 \begin_inset space ~
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15284 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset space ~
15296 \begin_inset space ~
15302 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15303 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15309 \begin_inset Index idx
15312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15313 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15323 This file type has the extension
15324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15335 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15338 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15339 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15340 -Errors or to process it manually
15341 with console commands.
15342 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15343 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15344 's temporary directory whenever you
15345 view or export your document.
15348 \begin_layout Standard
15349 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15350 -file using the menu
15352 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15358 export variants are explained in section
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15365 reference "subsec:Export"
15372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15374 \begin_inset Index idx
15377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15386 \begin_layout Standard
15387 This file type has the extension
15388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15408 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15409 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15410 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15416 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15417 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15418 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15419 when you view the DVI.
15420 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15426 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15427 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15432 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15433 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15435 \begin_inset space ~
15441 The latter option uses the program
15443 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15449 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15452 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15453 font access (see section
15454 \begin_inset space ~
15458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15460 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15465 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15466 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15473 \begin_inset Index idx
15476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15477 File formats ! PostScript
15485 \begin_layout Standard
15486 This file type has the extension
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15499 PostScript was developed by the company
15503 as a printer language.
15504 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15506 PostScript can be seen as a
15507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15510 programming language
15511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15514 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15519 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15526 \begin_inset Index idx
15529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15531 packages ! pstricks
15541 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15549 Encapsulated PostScript
15550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15553 (EPS, file extension
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15566 As \SpecialChar LyX
15567 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15568 convert them in the background to EPS.
15569 If, for example, you have 50
15570 \begin_inset space ~
15573 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15575 \begin_inset space ~
15578 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15579 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15581 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15582 EPS to avoid this problem.
15585 \begin_layout Standard
15586 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15588 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15589 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15597 \begin_inset Index idx
15600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15607 \begin_inset Index idx
15610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15619 \begin_layout Standard
15620 This file type has the extension
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15637 Portable Document Format
15638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15645 was derived from PostScript.
15646 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15656 looks exactly the same.
15659 \begin_layout Standard
15660 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15664 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15668 (JPG, file extension
15669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Network Graphics
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15700 (PNG, file extension
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15713 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15714 converts them in the
15715 background to one of these formats.
15716 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15717 will slow down your workflow.
15718 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15721 \begin_layout Standard
15722 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15724 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15730 \begin_layout Description
15732 \begin_inset space ~
15735 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15739 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15742 \begin_layout Description
15744 \begin_inset space ~
15751 ) This uses the program
15753 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15756 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15759 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15762 is a new engine, derived from
15766 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15767 access (see section
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15774 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15779 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15780 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15785 \begin_layout Description
15787 \begin_inset space ~
15794 ) This uses the program
15799 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15805 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15806 font access (see section
15807 \begin_inset space ~
15811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15818 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15819 vertically written Japanese.
15822 \begin_layout Description
15824 \begin_inset space ~
15827 (cropped) This is the same as
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15835 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15836 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15837 to generate good-looking
15838 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15841 \begin_layout Description
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15846 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15850 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15859 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15863 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15864 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15868 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15869 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15872 \begin_layout Standard
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15885 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15886 works without problems.
15887 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15888 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15892 \begin_inset space ~
15900 \begin_inset space ~
15905 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15915 \begin_inset Index idx
15918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15919 FileFormats ! XHTML
15925 \begin_inset Index idx
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15937 \begin_layout Standard
15938 This file type has the extension
15939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15951 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15952 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15953 When \SpecialChar LyX
15954 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15955 suitable for the purpose.
15956 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15962 between different formats, which are described in section
15964 Math Output in XHTML
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15977 \begin_layout Standard
15978 XHTML output remains
15979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15986 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15987 features are supported yet.
15991 and the World Wide Web
15995 Additional Features
15997 manual, for more information.
16000 \begin_layout Standard
16001 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16003 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16004 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16010 \begin_layout Subsection
16012 \begin_inset Index idx
16015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16026 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16035 or use the toolbar button
16042 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16043 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16044 \begin_inset space ~
16048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16050 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16054 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16056 \begin_inset space ~
16060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16062 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16067 Further output formats can be selected via
16069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16070 View (Other Formats)
16072 or the toolbar button
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16083 viewer window using the menu
16085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16091 Update (Other Formats)
16096 \begin_layout Standard
16097 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16100 To have a real output, export your document.
16103 \begin_layout Section
16104 A few Words about Typography
16105 \begin_inset Index idx
16108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16117 \begin_layout Subsection
16118 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16119 \begin_inset Index idx
16122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 \begin_inset Index idx
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \begin_layout Standard
16142 In \SpecialChar LyX
16144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16155 symbol comes in four variants: the
16172 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16178 \begin_layout Standard
16179 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16189 height_special "totalheight"
16194 backgroundcolor "none"
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Tabular
16199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16201 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16202 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16203 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16204 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16233 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16273 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16274 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 system key combination
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16313 and the em dash with
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16329 is the Mac label for the right
16338 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16342 \begin_inset space ~
16345 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16357 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16358 and 2014 for the en dash).
16364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16377 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 system key combination or
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16428 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16473 \begin_layout Standard
16474 Dashes can also be inserted with
16476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16478 \begin_inset space ~
16481 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16497 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16498 mode and has a length of its own.
16499 Here are some examples:
16502 \begin_layout Enumerate
16503 line- and page-breaks
16504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16514 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 \begin_inset space ~
16520 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16530 \begin_layout Enumerate
16531 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Enumerate
16543 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16547 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16557 \begin_layout Standard
16559 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16561 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16562 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16570 \begin_layout Subsection
16571 Dashes and Line Breaks
16572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16574 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16581 \begin_layout Standard
16582 Whether line breaks
16583 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438804
16585 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438805
16588 dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale:
16591 \begin_layout Itemize
16592 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash in ranges of
16593 values such as 1975–1982, but no line break should occur if only a single
16594 character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16597 \begin_layout Itemize
16598 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16602 \begin_layout Itemize
16603 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16604 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16607 \begin_layout Standard
16609 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437551
16610 In \SpecialChar LyX
16612 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437622
16613 The dashes that are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16614 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16615 by default generally allow for
16617 line breaks after en-dashes and em-dashes
16618 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437597
16619 as well as linebreaks before em-dashes.
16620 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438851
16621 are only allowed (without manual intervention), if the option
16623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16625 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16626 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16628 is selected (this is the default in \SpecialChar LyX
16633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16634 In this case, the dashes are output as
16635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 , respectively, when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16652 The \SpecialChar TeX
16653 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16654 by an optional line break.
16664 \begin_layout Standard
16668 \begin_layout Enumerate
16670 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437637
16671 This results in optional line breaks after
16678 Unwanted line breaks
16679 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437645
16681 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437646
16684 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16691 Prevent Hyphenation
16696 \begin_inset space ~
16706 , using protected spaces or preceding with
16712 in \SpecialChar TeX
16718 \begin_layout Itemize
16720 \begin_inset space ~
16724 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16734 height_special "totalheight"
16739 backgroundcolor "none"
16742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16751 \begin_layout Itemize
16752 With spaced en dashes
16753 \begin_inset space ~
16757 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16761 in British English and generally recommended by
16763 The Elements of Typographic Style
16766 \begin_inset space ~
16769 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16772 \begin_layout Itemize
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16779 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16780 \begin_inset space ~
16783 – sont très utiles.
16786 \begin_layout Itemize
16793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16802 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16805 \begin_layout Standard
16806 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16807 \begin_inset space ~
16810 – in contrast to an overfull line
16811 \begin_inset space ~
16814 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16819 \begin_layout Enumerate
16821 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437701
16822 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16836 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16837 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16842 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16845 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16856 \begin_layout Enumerate
16858 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437705
16876 \begin_layout Enumerate
16878 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437950
16879 The default dashes output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16881 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437951
16883 \change_inserted -712698321 1513437954
16887 \change_deleted -712698321 1513437961
16890 in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16893 \begin_layout Standard
16895 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438154
16896 you want to globally disable line breaks at dashes, you can select
16900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16902 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16904 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438180
16905 Disallow line breaks at dashes
16908 In this case optional line breaks at individual
16911 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438124
16912 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16914 has not been selected, you
16917 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438126
16919 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438191
16921 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438193
16925 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438149
16926 optional line breaks
16930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16931 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16932 Optional line break
16937 \begin_layout Itemize
16938 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16939 as common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16946 \change_inserted -712698321 1513440855
16947 Note: Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16949 \begin_inset space ~
16952 2.1, you could insert en-dashes and em-dashes as -- and ---, respectively;
16953 they were automatically merged to proper (breakable) dashes in the output,
16954 but kept as consecutive hyphen characters in the LyX document.
16955 If you inserted literal dash characters, however, they were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16961 dashes (this was actually rather by accident than intentionally, but some
16962 used these two forms of dashes deliberately).
16965 As of \SpecialChar LyX
16967 \begin_inset space ~
16971 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439795
16972 things work differently: consecutive hyphens are merged to dashes immediately
16977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439552
16980 The behavior was changed since it led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16982 HTML export and the PDF export.
16987 If you copy consecutive hyphens, by contrast, they are output as consecutive
16989 An unintended consequence of this change was that all dashes now were output
16990 as non-breakable dashes.
16992 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438403
16993 -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16999 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
17001 \begin_inset space ~
17004 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
17006 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
17014 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439864
17015 Since furthermore, in order to maintain the output,
17016 \change_deleted -712698321 1513439597
17018 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17022 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17023 of consecutive hyphens
17026 \change_deleted -712698321 1513439612
17030 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17034 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17037 \begin_inset space ~
17040 2.1 or earlier versions,
17041 \change_deleted -712698321 1513439871
17043 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439871
17046 re converted to literal
17047 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438458
17049 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17053 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17057 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17061 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439884
17062 , respectively, these were output to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17063 in \SpecialChar LyX
17065 \begin_inset space ~
17076 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439888
17077 An obvious drawback of all this was that
17078 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438506
17080 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439745
17082 \change_deleted -712698321 1513440124
17084 \change_inserted -712698321 1513440127
17087 different line breaks in some documents.
17090 \begin_inset space ~
17094 \change_inserted -712698321 1513439906
17095 , by contrast and as outlined above, outputs
17098 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441767
17103 dashes by default, so if you load a document saved previous to LyX 2.2,
17104 you should get the identical output with LyX 2.3 for the dashes inserted
17106 Furthermore, \SpecialChar LyX
17108 \begin_inset space ~
17113 provides the aforementioned option
17114 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438447
17117 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
17118 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441759
17119 Disallow line breaks at dashes
17125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17131 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438517
17133 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441759
17137 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438522
17140 selected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17142 \begin_inset space ~
17146 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441759
17147 in order to maintain line breaking between \SpecialChar LyX
17148 2.2 and 2.3 (so these document
17149 have non-breakable dashes)
17152 \begin_inset Newline newline
17155 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
17159 \begin_layout Itemize
17161 \change_inserted -712698321 1513440192
17164 literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17166 \begin_inset space ~
17169 2.2 documents, you must manually
17170 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438688
17174 \change_deleted -712698321 1513438687
17177 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
17178 \change_inserted -712698321 1513438687
17179 Disallow line breaks at dashes
17183 to ensure unchanged behavior.
17187 \begin_layout Itemize
17189 \change_deleted -712698321 1513441852
17193 \change_deleted -712698321 1513441864
17195 \change_inserted -712698321 1513441867
17198 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17200 \begin_inset space ~
17203 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17204 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavio
17205 \change_deleted -712698321 1513441864
17211 \begin_layout Itemize
17212 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
17213 documents that follow literal
17214 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17220 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
17221 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
17223 \begin_inset space ~
17226 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
17229 \begin_layout Subsection
17231 \begin_inset Index idx
17234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17243 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17250 \begin_layout Standard
17251 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17252 but automatically in the output.
17253 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17259 \begin_inset Index idx
17262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17269 following the rules of the document language.
17272 \begin_layout Standard
17274 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17278 font and with unusual constructs, like
17279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17287 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17288 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17289 This is done with the menu
17291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17294 \begin_inset space ~
17300 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17302 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17306 \begin_layout Standard
17307 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17308 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 would then see the hyphen
17320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17327 as a hyphenation possibility.
17328 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17329 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17333 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17336 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17338 Prevent Hyphenation
17343 \begin_inset space ~
17351 \begin_layout Subsection
17353 \begin_inset Index idx
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17366 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17369 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17376 \begin_layout Standard
17377 When \SpecialChar LyX
17378 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17379 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17381 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17387 appropriate amount of space.
17388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17391 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17393 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17394 gets after another word.
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17399 not work in all cases.
17401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17412 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17413 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17416 \begin_layout Standard
17417 Here are some examples of
17421 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17424 \begin_layout Itemize
17429 \begin_layout Itemize
17434 \begin_layout Standard
17435 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17438 \begin_layout Itemize
17440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17444 this is too much space!
17447 \begin_layout Itemize
17452 \begin_layout Standard
17453 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17456 \begin_layout Standard
17457 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17460 \begin_layout Enumerate
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17469 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17470 \begin_inset space ~
17474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17476 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17481 \begin_inset Index idx
17484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17485 Spaces ! inter-word
17493 \begin_layout Enumerate
17497 \begin_inset space ~
17502 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17503 \begin_inset space ~
17507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17509 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17514 \begin_inset Index idx
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17526 \begin_layout Enumerate
17530 \begin_inset space ~
17534 \begin_inset space ~
17538 \begin_inset space ~
17545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17547 \begin_inset space ~
17552 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17553 This function is also bound to
17556 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17562 \begin_layout Standard
17563 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17566 \begin_layout Itemize
17568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17572 \begin_inset space \space{}
17575 this is too much space!
17578 \begin_layout Itemize
17579 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17585 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17587 will take care of this.
17590 \begin_layout Standard
17591 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17595 \begin_inset space ~
17601 feature described in the section
17603 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17608 Additional Features
17613 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17615 \begin_inset Index idx
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17619 Typography ! Quotation marks
17625 \begin_inset Index idx
17628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17629 Quotation marks | see
17633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_layout Standard
17661 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17662 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17663 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17673 The keyboard character,
17677 , generates this automatically.
17680 \begin_layout Standard
17681 You can specify what character the
17685 key produces by using the submenu
17691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17695 \begin_inset Index idx
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 Document ! Settings
17704 dialog and switching the
17708 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17709 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17711 \begin_inset space ~
17717 \begin_layout Labeling
17718 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17730 \begin_inset space ~
17734 \begin_inset space ~
17738 \begin_inset Quotes els
17742 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17756 \begin_inset Quotes els
17760 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17763 quotation marks (as common, e.
17764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17770 \begin_layout Labeling
17771 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17774 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17778 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17782 \begin_inset space ~
17786 \begin_inset space ~
17790 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17794 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17800 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17804 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17808 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17812 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17815 quotation marks (as common, e.
17816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17822 \begin_layout Labeling
17823 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17826 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17830 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17838 \begin_inset space ~
17842 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17846 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17852 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17856 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17860 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17864 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17867 quotation marks (as common, e.
17868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17874 \begin_layout Labeling
17875 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17878 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17882 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17886 \begin_inset space ~
17890 \begin_inset space ~
17894 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17898 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17904 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17908 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17912 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17916 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17919 quotation marks (as common, e.
17920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17926 \begin_layout Labeling
17927 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17930 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17934 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17938 \begin_inset space ~
17942 \begin_inset space ~
17946 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17950 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17956 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17960 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17964 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17968 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17971 quotation marks (as common, e.
17972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17975 g., in Switzerland)
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17982 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17986 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17990 \begin_inset space ~
17994 \begin_inset space ~
17998 \begin_inset Quotes als
18002 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18008 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18012 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18016 \begin_inset Quotes als
18020 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18023 quotation marks (as common, e.
18024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18030 \begin_layout Labeling
18031 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18034 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18038 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18042 \begin_inset space ~
18046 \begin_inset space ~
18050 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18054 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18060 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18064 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18068 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18072 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18075 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18078 \begin_layout Labeling
18079 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18082 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18086 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18090 \begin_inset space ~
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18098 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18102 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18108 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18112 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18116 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18120 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18123 quotation marks (as common, e.
18124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18127 g., in Great Britain)
18130 \begin_layout Labeling
18131 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18134 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18138 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18142 \begin_inset space ~
18146 \begin_inset space ~
18150 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18154 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18160 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18164 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18168 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18172 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18175 quotation marks (as common, e.
18176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18182 \begin_layout Labeling
18183 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18186 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18190 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18206 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18212 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18216 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18220 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18224 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18227 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18232 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18233 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18234 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18235 the inner marks differ).
18243 \begin_layout Labeling
18244 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18247 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18251 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18255 \begin_inset space ~
18259 \begin_inset space ~
18263 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18267 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18273 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18277 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18281 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18285 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18288 quotation marks (as common, e.
18289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18295 \begin_layout Labeling
18296 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18299 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18303 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18307 \begin_inset space ~
18311 \begin_inset space ~
18315 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18319 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18325 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18329 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18333 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18337 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18340 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18343 \begin_layout Labeling
18344 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18345 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18353 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18359 \begin_inset space ~
18363 \begin_inset space ~
18369 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18377 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18381 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18385 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18389 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18393 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18396 quotation marks (as common, e.
18397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18405 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18406 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18414 \begin_layout Labeling
18415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18416 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18424 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18430 \begin_inset space ~
18434 \begin_inset space ~
18440 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18448 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18452 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18456 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18460 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18464 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18467 quotation marks (as common, e.
18468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18471 g., in North Korea and China)
18475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18476 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18477 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18485 \begin_layout Standard
18486 Inner quotation marks
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18492 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18493 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18501 does not necessarily mean
18502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18510 This is why we call them
18511 \begin_inset Quotes els
18515 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18531 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18533 \begin_inset Quotes els
18537 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18540 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18543 arg "quote-insert inner"
18548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18554 \begin_layout Standard
18555 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18556 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18557 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18558 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18559 If you check the setting
18561 Use dynamic quotation marks
18565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18569 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18570 they appear in a special color).
18571 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18572 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18577 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18580 \begin_layout Standard
18581 Individual quotation marks (i.
18582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18585 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18586 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18590 \begin_layout Subsection
18592 \begin_inset Index idx
18595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 Typography ! Ligatures
18602 \begin_inset Index idx
18605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18636 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18643 \begin_layout Standard
18644 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18645 print them as single characters.
18646 These groups are known as
18651 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18652 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18654 Here are the standard ligatures:
18657 \begin_layout Itemize
18661 \begin_layout Itemize
18665 \begin_layout Itemize
18669 \begin_layout Itemize
18673 \begin_layout Itemize
18677 \begin_layout Standard
18678 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18681 \begin_layout Standard
18682 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18683 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18691 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18707 To break a ligature, use
18709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18730 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18747 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18755 \begin_layout Subsection
18757 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18759 \begin_inset Index idx
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18772 \begin_layout Standard
18775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18776 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18780 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18783 \begin_layout Description
18785 The name of the game.
18788 \begin_layout Description
18790 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18794 \begin_layout Description
18796 The \SpecialChar TeX
18797 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18801 \begin_layout Description
18802 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18803 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18807 \begin_layout Standard
18808 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18814 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18822 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18823 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18824 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18825 converges to the number
18826 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18829 : The actual version is
18830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18838 , the previous one was
18839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18850 \begin_layout Subsection
18852 \begin_inset Index idx
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 \begin_layout Standard
18865 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18866 space between two words.
18867 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18877 for units use the menu
18879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18880 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18882 \begin_inset space ~
18890 arg "space-insert thin"
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18897 Here is an example to show the differences:
18900 \begin_layout Standard
18901 \begin_inset Tabular
18902 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18903 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18904 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18905 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18916 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 space between number and unit
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18944 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18956 half space between number and unit
18969 \begin_layout Subsection
18971 \begin_inset Index idx
18974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18975 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18983 \begin_layout Standard
18984 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18986 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18987 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18988 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18989 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18990 These bits of text became known as
19001 \begin_layout Standard
19002 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19003 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19004 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19005 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19006 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19007 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19008 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19009 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19010 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19011 \begin_inset Newline newline
19019 \begin_inset Newline newline
19027 \begin_inset Newline newline
19030 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19031 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19032 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19034 \begin_inset space ~
19038 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19040 key "latexcompanion"
19046 \begin_inset space ~
19050 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19057 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19058 's page break mechanism.
19061 \begin_layout Chapter
19062 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19065 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19072 \begin_layout Standard
19073 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19076 \begin_inset space ~
19082 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19085 \begin_layout Section
19087 \begin_inset Index idx
19090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19108 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19111 \begin_layout Description
19114 \begin_inset space ~
19117 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19118 \begin_inset Newline newline
19122 \begin_inset Note Note
19125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19126 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19134 \begin_layout Description
19135 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19136 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19137 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19140 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19141 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19143 \begin_inset space ~
19149 \begin_inset Newline newline
19153 \begin_inset Note Comment
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19166 \begin_layout Description
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19171 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19172 set in the document settings under
19174 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19182 \begin_inset Newline newline
19186 \begin_inset Newline newline
19190 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19199 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19200 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19205 of a comment that appears in the output.
19211 \begin_inset Newline newline
19215 \begin_inset Newline newline
19218 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19234 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19237 \begin_layout Section
19239 \begin_inset Index idx
19242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19251 name "sec:Footnotes"
19258 \begin_layout Standard
19260 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19266 or the toolbar button
19269 arg "footnote-insert"
19281 \begin_inset Graphics
19282 filename clipart/footnote.png
19291 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19292 's representation of your footnote.
19302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19321 label, the box will
19325 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19326 Clicking on the box label again will close
19339 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19340 and click on the footnote
19355 \begin_layout Standard
19356 Here is an example footnote:
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19365 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19373 \begin_layout Standard
19374 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19375 position where the footnote box is placed.
19376 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19377 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19378 according to the document class.
19380 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19381 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19387 ey are described in the
19390 \begin_inset space ~
19398 \begin_layout Section
19400 \begin_inset Index idx
19403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19412 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19419 \begin_layout Standard
19420 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19422 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19426 \begin_inset space ~
19431 or the toolbar button
19434 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19460 appearing within your text.
19461 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19462 's representation of your margin
19471 \begin_layout Standard
19472 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19476 \begin_inset Marginal
19479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 This is a marginal note.
19489 \begin_layout Standard
19490 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19491 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19492 pages, right on odd pages.
19495 \begin_layout Standard
19496 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19499 \begin_inset space ~
19507 \begin_inset space ~
19515 \begin_layout Section
19516 Graphics and Images
19517 \begin_inset Index idx
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 \begin_inset Index idx
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19539 name "sec:Graphics"
19546 \begin_layout Standard
19547 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19548 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19551 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19560 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19563 \begin_layout Standard
19564 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19569 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19570 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19572 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19573 \begin_inset space ~
19577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19579 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19586 \begin_layout Standard
19591 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19592 of the image in the output.
19593 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19597 \begin_inset space ~
19601 \begin_inset space ~
19610 \begin_inset space ~
19614 \begin_inset space ~
19618 \begin_inset space ~
19623 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19624 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19632 \begin_layout Standard
19636 \begin_inset space ~
19640 \begin_inset space ~
19645 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19646 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19648 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19653 \begin_inset space ~
19658 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19659 with the image size is printed.
19662 \begin_layout Standard
19663 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19664 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19666 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19669 \begin_layout Standard
19671 \begin_inset Graphics
19672 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19680 \begin_layout Standard
19681 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19682 the image into a float, see section
19683 \begin_inset space ~
19687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19689 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19696 \begin_layout Subsection
19698 \begin_inset Index idx
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19710 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19717 \begin_layout Standard
19718 You can insert images in any known file format.
19719 But as we explained in section
19720 \begin_inset space ~
19724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19726 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19730 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19732 therefore uses the program
19736 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19737 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19738 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19739 \begin_inset space ~
19743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19745 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19752 \begin_layout Standard
19753 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19756 \begin_layout Description
19758 \begin_inset space ~
19761 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19762 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19763 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19767 Graphics Interchange Format
19768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19771 (GIF, file extension
19772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19784 \begin_inset Index idx
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19819 Portable Network Graphics
19820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19823 (PNG, file extension
19824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19836 \begin_inset Index idx
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19871 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19875 (JPG, file extension
19876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19900 \begin_inset Index idx
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 \begin_layout Description
19936 \begin_inset space ~
19939 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19941 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19942 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19943 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19944 \begin_inset Newline newline
19947 Scalable image formats can be
19948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19951 Scalable Vector Graphics
19952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19955 (SVG, file extension
19956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19968 \begin_inset Index idx
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20003 Encapsulated PostScript
20004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20007 (EPS, file extension
20008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20020 \begin_inset Index idx
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20055 Portable Document Format
20056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20059 (PDF, file extension
20060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20072 \begin_inset Index idx
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20090 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20091 result will not be scalable.
20092 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20098 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20106 \begin_layout Standard
20107 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20114 \begin_layout Subsection
20115 Grouping of Image Settings
20116 \begin_inset Index idx
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 Images ! Settings grouping
20128 \begin_layout Standard
20129 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20131 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20132 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20134 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20135 need to manually change each of them.
20139 \begin_layout Standard
20140 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20143 \begin_inset space ~
20147 \begin_inset space ~
20159 \begin_inset space ~
20163 \begin_inset space ~
20169 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20170 and checking the name of the desired group.
20173 \begin_layout Section
20175 \begin_inset Index idx
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20194 \begin_layout Standard
20195 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20198 arg "tabular-insert"
20203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20207 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20208 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20209 from the rest of the table.
20210 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20211 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20213 Here is an example table:
20216 \begin_layout Standard
20218 \begin_inset Tabular
20219 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20220 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20221 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20222 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20223 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20224 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 \begin_layout Subsection
20428 \begin_layout Standard
20429 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20432 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20436 This brings up the table dialog.
20437 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20438 cursor is placed currently.
20439 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20440 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20441 done on all of your selection.
20444 \begin_layout Standard
20445 In addition to the table dialog, the
20448 \begin_inset space ~
20453 helps you in setting table properties.
20454 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20457 \begin_layout Standard
20461 \begin_inset space ~
20466 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20467 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20468 current cell respectively.
20469 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20471 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20472 of text, see section
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20479 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20486 \begin_layout Standard
20487 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20488 using the check box
20497 This will merge the cells to
20501 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20502 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20503 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20504 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20505 in the last row without the upper border:
20508 \begin_layout Standard
20510 \begin_inset Tabular
20511 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20512 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20513 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20514 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20516 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 \begin_layout Standard
20648 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20649 -arguments for the table.
20650 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20651 explained in the chapter
20658 \begin_inset space ~
20664 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20665 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20666 but are visible in the output.
20669 \begin_layout Standard
20670 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 Most DVI-viewers are
20682 able to display rotations.
20690 \begin_layout Standard
20695 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20700 adds lines for all cell borders.
20703 \begin_layout Subsection
20705 \begin_inset Index idx
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 Tables ! Multi-page
20715 \begin_inset Index idx
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 \begin_layout Standard
20728 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20731 \begin_inset space ~
20735 \begin_inset space ~
20743 \begin_inset space ~
20748 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20749 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20752 \begin_layout Description
20757 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20758 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20759 Except for the first page, if
20762 \begin_inset space ~
20770 \begin_layout Description
20774 \begin_inset space ~
20779 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20780 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20783 \begin_layout Description
20788 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20789 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20790 except for the last page, if
20793 \begin_inset space ~
20801 \begin_layout Description
20805 \begin_inset space ~
20810 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20811 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20814 \begin_layout Description
20815 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20816 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20822 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20825 \begin_inset space ~
20833 \begin_layout Standard
20834 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20835 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20836 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20842 In this context, first means first in this order:
20845 \begin_inset space ~
20857 \begin_inset space ~
20862 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20865 \begin_layout Standard
20867 \begin_inset Tabular
20868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20869 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20870 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20871 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20872 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20873 <row endfirsthead="true">
20874 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20885 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <row endfirsthead="true">
20905 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <row endhead="true">
20938 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20968 <row endhead="true">
20969 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <row endfoot="true">
21002 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22983 <row endlastfoot="true">
22984 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 \begin_layout Subsection
23023 \begin_inset Index idx
23026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23035 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23042 \begin_layout Standard
23043 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23044 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23045 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23046 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23050 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23053 \begin_layout Standard
23054 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23055 for the column in the table dialog.
23056 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23057 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23061 \begin_layout Standard
23063 \begin_inset Tabular
23064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23067 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 This is longer now.
23218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23270 This is longer now.
23275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 \begin_layout Standard
23302 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23303 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23309 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23315 Selection with the mouse or with
23319 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23320 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23321 the selection from outside the table.
23324 \begin_layout Section
23326 \begin_inset Index idx
23329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23345 \begin_layout Subsection
23349 \begin_layout Standard
23350 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23351 have a fixed location.
23353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23360 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23368 \begin_inset space ~
23373 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23374 too many notes on the current page.
23377 \begin_layout Standard
23378 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23379 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23380 and pages without text.
23381 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23382 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23383 Floats are therefore numbered.
23384 Referencing is described in section
23385 \begin_inset space ~
23389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23391 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23398 \begin_layout Standard
23399 To insert a float, use the menu
23401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23405 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23406 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23408 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23409 \begin_inset Index idx
23412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23419 paragraph within the float.
23420 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23421 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23422 left-clicking on the box label.
23423 A closed float box looks like this:
23424 \begin_inset Graphics
23425 filename clipart/float.png
23430 – a gray button with a red label.
23433 \begin_layout Standard
23434 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23436 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23439 \begin_layout Subsection
23441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23443 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23448 \begin_inset Index idx
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 Floats ! Figure floats
23460 \begin_layout Standard
23462 \begin_inset space ~
23466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23468 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23472 was created using the menu
23474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23475 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23481 arg "float-insert figure"
23485 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23494 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23498 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23499 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23501 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23503 \begin_inset space ~
23511 arg "layout-paragraph"
23517 \begin_layout Standard
23518 \begin_inset Float figure
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 \begin_inset Graphics
23526 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23541 name "fig:A-star-in"
23558 \begin_layout Standard
23559 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23560 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23571 ) and refer to it using the menu
23573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23579 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23583 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23584 vague references like
23585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23592 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23593 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23603 For more about cross-references, see section
23604 \begin_inset space ~
23608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23610 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23617 \begin_layout Standard
23618 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23619 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23620 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23621 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23622 as described in section
23623 \begin_inset space ~
23627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23629 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23635 \begin_inset space ~
23639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23641 reference "fig:Two-images"
23645 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23646 You can also set the images one below the other.
23648 \begin_inset space ~
23652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23654 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23661 reference "fig:Star"
23665 are the subfigures.
23668 \begin_layout Standard
23669 \begin_inset Float figure
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23679 \begin_inset Float figure
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23690 name "fig:Undefinable"
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23703 \begin_inset Graphics
23704 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23716 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23720 \begin_inset Float figure
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23744 \begin_inset Graphics
23745 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23769 name "fig:Two-images"
23786 \begin_layout Subsection
23788 \begin_inset Index idx
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 Floats ! Table floats
23800 \begin_layout Standard
23801 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23804 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23807 or the toolbar button
23810 arg "float-insert table"
23814 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23815 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23816 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23818 \begin_inset space ~
23822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23824 reference "tab:Table-float"
23831 \begin_layout Standard
23832 \begin_inset Float table
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23843 name "tab:Table-float"
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 \begin_inset Tabular
23858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23859 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24013 \end{array}\right]$
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24055 \begin_layout Subsection
24057 \begin_inset Index idx
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 \begin_layout Standard
24071 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24072 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24073 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24075 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24083 \begin_inset space ~
24091 \begin_layout Section
24093 \begin_inset Index idx
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 \begin_layout Standard
24107 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24109 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24110 \begin_inset space \space{}
24117 \begin_layout Standard
24118 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24119 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24125 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24126 and its alignment within the page.
24129 \begin_layout Standard
24131 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24141 height_special "totalheight"
24146 backgroundcolor "none"
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 This is a minipage.
24153 The text is set in an italic style.
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24160 another formatting.
24168 \begin_layout Standard
24169 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24172 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24176 as described in section
24177 \begin_inset space ~
24181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24183 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24188 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24194 \begin_layout Standard
24195 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24205 height_special "totalheight"
24210 backgroundcolor "none"
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24215 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24221 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24225 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24235 height_special "totalheight"
24240 backgroundcolor "none"
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24245 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24253 \begin_layout Standard
24254 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24260 \begin_layout Standard
24261 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24263 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24270 \begin_inset space ~
24278 \begin_layout Chapter
24279 Mathematical Formulas
24280 \begin_inset Index idx
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 \begin_inset Index idx
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24324 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24331 \begin_layout Standard
24332 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24337 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24340 \begin_layout Section
24342 \begin_inset Index idx
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 \begin_layout Standard
24355 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24368 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24370 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24371 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24372 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24380 \begin_layout Standard
24381 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24385 \begin_inset space ~
24390 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24393 \begin_layout Standard
24394 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24395 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24398 \begin_layout Standard
24399 This is a line with an inline formula
24400 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24406 \begin_layout Standard
24407 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24408 paragraph, like this one:
24409 \begin_inset Formula
24416 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24419 \begin_layout Standard
24421 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24423 For example, typing
24424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24437 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24438 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24442 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24445 \begin_inset space ~
24453 \begin_layout Subsection
24454 Navigating in Formulas
24455 \begin_inset Index idx
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 \begin_layout Standard
24468 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24469 achieved with the arrow keys.
24471 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24472 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24477 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24478 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24482 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24486 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24489 \end{array}\right]$
24497 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24502 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24503 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24506 \begin_layout Standard
24511 , printed in this document as
24512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24516 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24523 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24524 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24525 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24530 For example, if you want
24531 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24539 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24549 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24553 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24558 , since in the latter case only the
24561 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24566 will be under the square root sign:
24567 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24573 \begin_layout Standard
24574 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24576 \begin_inset Formula
24578 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24587 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24588 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24591 \begin_layout Subsection
24595 \begin_layout Standard
24596 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24597 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24601 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24602 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24603 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24604 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24605 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24609 \begin_layout Subsection
24610 Exponents and Subscripts
24611 \begin_inset Index idx
24614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 \begin_inset Index idx
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24633 \begin_layout Standard
24634 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24637 arg "math-superscript"
24643 arg "math-subscript"
24646 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24648 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24651 , type in a formula
24654 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24664 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24670 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24674 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24680 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24686 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24695 , you have to use an extra
24699 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24700 For example, if you want
24701 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24707 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24713 Subscripts are similar: To get
24714 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24720 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24728 \begin_layout Subsection
24730 \begin_inset Index idx
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24742 \begin_layout Standard
24743 Create a fraction either with the command
24749 or by using the icon
24752 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24758 \begin_inset space ~
24764 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24765 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24766 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24771 To move back up, press
24776 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24777 \begin_inset Formula
24779 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24782 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24790 \begin_layout Subsection
24792 \begin_inset Index idx
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 \begin_layout Standard
24805 Roots can be created using the
24808 \begin_inset space ~
24816 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24822 arg "math-insert \\root"
24844 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24850 always produces a square root.
24853 \begin_layout Subsection
24854 Operators with Limits
24855 \begin_inset Index idx
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 \begin_inset Index idx
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24877 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24884 \begin_layout Standard
24886 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24890 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24893 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24894 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24895 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24896 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24897 The sum operator will automatically place its
24898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24905 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24907 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24911 \begin_inset Formula
24913 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24918 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24922 \begin_layout Standard
24923 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24925 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24926 behind the operator and using the menu
24928 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24929 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24931 \begin_inset space ~
24935 \begin_inset space ~
24949 \begin_layout Standard
24950 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24959 \begin_inset Index idx
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 \begin_inset Formula
24971 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24976 which will place the
24977 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24989 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24990 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24996 \begin_layout Standard
24997 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25004 Have a look at section
25005 \begin_inset space ~
25009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25011 reference "subsec:Functions"
25015 for an explanation of function macros.
25018 \begin_layout Subsection
25020 \begin_inset Index idx
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 \begin_layout Standard
25033 Most math symbols can be found in the
25036 \begin_inset space ~
25041 under one of several categories; including
25058 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25062 \begin_layout Standard
25063 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25064 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25065 don't have to use the
25068 \begin_inset space ~
25073 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25075 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25078 \begin_layout Subsection
25080 \begin_inset Index idx
25083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25092 \begin_layout Standard
25093 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25099 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25105 \begin_inset space ~
25113 arg "math-insert \\space"
25117 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25118 For example, the sequence
25123 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25126 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25128 \begin_inset Graphics
25129 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25134 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25135 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25136 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25137 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25138 , because they are negative
25140 Here are two examples:
25143 \begin_layout Standard
25153 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25159 \begin_layout Standard
25169 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25175 \begin_layout Subsection
25177 \begin_inset Index idx
25180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25189 name "subsec:Functions"
25196 \begin_layout Standard
25200 \begin_inset space ~
25205 contains under the button
25208 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25211 a number of function macros, such as
25212 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25216 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25224 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25231 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25232 avoid confusions, because
25233 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25237 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25243 \begin_layout Standard
25244 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25246 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25250 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25256 \begin_layout Standard
25257 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25258 are placed, as described in section
25259 \begin_inset space ~
25263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25265 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25272 \begin_layout Subsection
25274 \begin_inset Index idx
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_layout Standard
25287 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25289 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25290 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25291 commands, for example, to enter
25292 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25295 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25296 Our example is entered by typing
25301 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25308 \begin_inset space ~
25312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25314 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25318 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25321 \begin_layout Standard
25322 \begin_inset Float table
25327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25333 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25337 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 \begin_inset Tabular
25348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25349 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25436 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25490 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25598 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25652 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25706 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25760 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25814 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25868 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25913 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25934 \begin_layout Standard
25935 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25938 \begin_inset space ~
25946 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25949 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25953 \begin_layout Section
25954 Brackets and Delimiters
25955 \begin_inset Index idx
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 \begin_inset Index idx
25968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25977 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25984 \begin_layout Standard
25985 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25987 For some purposes, using just the keys
25992 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25993 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25994 toolbar delimiter icon
25997 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26001 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26002 \begin_inset Formula
26004 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26012 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26013 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26017 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26020 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26026 \begin_inset Formula
26028 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26036 \begin_layout Standard
26037 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26038 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26042 \begin_layout Standard
26043 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26044 left side and right side.
26045 If you use the option
26048 \begin_inset space ~
26053 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26054 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26056 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26061 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26062 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26065 \begin_layout Standard
26066 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26067 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26068 is to go inside the brackets.
26069 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26074 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26075 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26076 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26080 arg "math-delim ( )"
26086 \begin_layout Section
26087 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26088 \begin_inset Index idx
26091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 \begin_inset Index idx
26101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26108 \begin_inset Index idx
26111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26112 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26120 \begin_layout Standard
26121 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26125 \begin_inset space ~
26133 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26137 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
26138 Here is an example:
26139 \begin_inset Formula
26141 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26150 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26151 \begin_inset space ~
26155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26157 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26162 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26163 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26164 This alignment is set in the box
26169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26218 for every column as default.
26219 For example, the sequence
26220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26231 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26232 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26233 corresponds to the relevant column.
26234 The result will look like this:
26235 \begin_inset Formula
26238 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26239 column & has & has\,right\\
26240 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26249 \begin_layout Standard
26250 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26253 arg "newline-insert newline"
26256 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26257 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26259 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26262 or the math toolbar.
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26267 It can be created with the menu
26269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26270 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26272 \begin_inset space ~
26284 Here is an example:
26285 \begin_inset Formula
26299 \begin_layout Standard
26300 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26303 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26306 arg "newline-insert newline"
26310 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26315 arg "newline-insert newline"
26318 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26326 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26327 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26328 A new row is created by every further entry of
26331 arg "newline-insert newline"
26335 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26336 Here is an example:
26337 \begin_inset Formula
26339 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26340 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26345 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26346 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26347 \begin_inset Formula
26349 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26357 \begin_layout Standard
26358 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26365 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26366 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26369 reference "eq:asquared"
26374 The other types are described in section
26375 \begin_inset space ~
26379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26381 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26388 \begin_layout Section
26389 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26390 \begin_inset Index idx
26393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 Math ! Formula numbering
26400 \begin_inset Index idx
26403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 Math ! Referencing formulas
26410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26412 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26419 \begin_layout Standard
26420 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26422 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26423 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26425 \begin_inset space ~
26429 \begin_inset space ~
26437 arg "math-number-toggle"
26441 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26442 within parentheses.
26443 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26444 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26445 the document class.
26446 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26447 separated by a dot:
26448 \begin_inset Formula
26458 arg "math-number-toggle"
26461 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26462 You can only number displayed formulas.
26465 \begin_layout Standard
26466 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26469 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26471 \begin_inset space ~
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26483 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26486 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26487 \begin_inset Formula
26490 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26496 To number all lines use the shortcut
26499 arg "math-number-toggle"
26505 \begin_layout Standard
26506 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26509 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26510 A label is inserted with the menu
26512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26521 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26522 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26523 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26535 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26536 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26537 We inserted in the following example the label
26538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26545 in the second line:
26546 \begin_inset Formula
26548 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26549 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26554 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26555 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26556 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26560 \begin_inset space ~
26568 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26572 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26573 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26574 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26575 as the formula number:
26578 \begin_layout Standard
26579 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26582 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26589 \begin_layout Standard
26590 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26591 's cross-reference box are described in section
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26598 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26603 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26611 \begin_layout Section
26612 User defined math macros
26613 \begin_inset Index idx
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 \begin_layout Standard
26627 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26628 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26629 Math macros are explained in section
26632 \begin_inset space ~
26644 \begin_layout Section
26648 \begin_layout Subsection
26650 \begin_inset Index idx
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 \begin_layout Standard
26663 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26664 To set a font in a formula, use the
26667 \begin_inset space ~
26675 arg "math-insert \\font"
26678 , or enter its command, listed in table
26679 \begin_inset space ~
26683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26685 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26692 \begin_layout Standard
26693 \begin_inset Float table
26698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26699 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26704 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26708 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 \begin_inset Tabular
26719 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26720 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26721 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26722 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26754 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26781 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26808 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26841 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26895 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26929 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26956 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26990 \begin_layout Standard
26991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26999 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27015 \begin_layout Standard
27016 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27017 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27022 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27023 space when you need a space in the box.
27024 Here is an example where
27025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27036 denotes the set of numbers:
27037 \begin_inset Formula
27039 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27047 \begin_layout Standard
27048 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27049 You can, for example, put a character in
27058 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27062 \begin_inset Newline newline
27065 So it is better not to use this feature.
27068 \begin_layout Standard
27069 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27070 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27074 \begin_inset Newline newline
27077 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27083 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27084 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27097 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27100 \begin_layout Standard
27101 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27103 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27104 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27106 \begin_inset space ~
27114 \begin_layout Subsection
27116 \begin_inset Index idx
27119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27128 \begin_layout Standard
27129 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27131 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27135 \begin_inset space ~
27139 \begin_inset space ~
27147 \begin_inset space ~
27155 arg "math-insert \\font"
27159 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27160 in black instead of blue.
27161 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27162 Here is an example:
27163 \begin_inset Formula
27166 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27167 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27176 \begin_layout Subsection
27178 \begin_inset Index idx
27181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27191 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27192 automatically chosen in most situations.
27210 For most characters,
27218 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27219 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27224 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27225 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27226 thinks are appropriate.
27227 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27230 arg "math-insert \\style"
27234 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27235 For example, you can set
27236 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27239 , which is normally in
27248 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27252 The four styles are used in the following example:
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27260 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27264 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27268 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27274 \begin_layout Standard
27275 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27276 is set in a particular size with the menu
27278 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27280 \begin_inset space ~
27285 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27286 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27287 will be adjusted to correspond.
27288 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27303 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27309 \begin_layout Section
27310 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27312 \begin_inset Index idx
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 \begin_inset Index idx
27325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27334 \begin_layout Standard
27336 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27337 that are in common use.
27340 \begin_layout Subsection
27341 Enabling AMS-Support
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27346 the document by selecting the checkbox
27349 \begin_inset space ~
27353 \begin_inset space ~
27357 \begin_inset space ~
27364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27368 \begin_inset Index idx
27371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27372 Document ! Settings
27380 \begin_inset space ~
27386 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27387 -errors in formulas,
27388 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27391 \begin_layout Subsection
27393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27395 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27400 \begin_inset Index idx
27403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27404 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27412 \begin_layout Standard
27413 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27414 provides a selection of different formula types.
27416 allows you to choose between
27437 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27438 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27445 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27448 \begin_layout Chapter
27452 \begin_layout Section
27454 \begin_inset Index idx
27457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27466 name "sec:Cross-References"
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27475 's strengths is cross-references.
27476 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27478 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27479 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27480 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27483 \begin_layout Enumerate
27487 \begin_layout Enumerate
27488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27490 name "enu:Second-item"
27497 \begin_layout Enumerate
27501 \begin_layout Standard
27502 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27507 or by pressing the toolbar button
27514 A gray label box like this:
27515 \begin_inset Graphics
27516 filename clipart/label.png
27520 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27522 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27557 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27558 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27574 \begin_layout Standard
27575 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27580 or the toolbar button
27583 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27587 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27588 \begin_inset Graphics
27589 filename clipart/reference.png
27593 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27595 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27608 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27612 \begin_layout Standard
27613 As an alternative to
27615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27618 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27623 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27624 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27626 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27639 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27640 \begin_inset space ~
27644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27646 reference "enu:Second-item"
27653 \begin_layout Standard
27654 It is recommended to use a protected space
27658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27659 described in section
27660 \begin_inset space ~
27664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27666 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27675 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27676 line breaks between them.
27679 \begin_layout Standard
27680 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27683 \begin_layout Description
27684 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27687 reference "fig:Two-images"
27694 \begin_layout Description
27695 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27696 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27708 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27715 \begin_layout Description
27716 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27717 \begin_inset space ~
27721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27722 LatexCommand pageref
27723 reference "fig:Two-images"
27730 \begin_layout Description
27732 \begin_inset space ~
27736 \begin_inset space ~
27739 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27741 LatexCommand vpageref
27742 reference "fig:Two-images"
27747 \begin_inset Newline newline
27750 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27751 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27752 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27753 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27754 it prints “on the next page”.
27755 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27758 \begin_layout Description
27760 \begin_inset space ~
27764 \begin_inset space ~
27768 \begin_inset space ~
27771 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27774 reference "fig:Two-images"
27779 \begin_inset Newline newline
27782 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27788 ; otherwise it behaves like
27792 \begin_inset space ~
27796 \begin_inset space ~
27805 \begin_layout Description
27807 \begin_inset space ~
27810 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27811 \begin_inset Newline newline
27815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27823 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27833 \begin_inset Index idx
27836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 packages ! prettyref
27844 \begin_inset Index idx
27847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27849 packages ! refstyle
27860 \begin_inset Newline newline
27863 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27864 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27867 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27872 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27880 is the default and preferred because
27884 supports only English documents.
27885 The format is specified by using the command
27897 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27898 preamble of the document.
27899 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27917 \begin_inset Newline newline
27924 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27929 \begin_inset Newline newline
27940 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27941 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27943 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27944 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27949 , you might do so as follows:
27950 \begin_inset Newline newline
27957 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27962 \begin_inset Newline newline
27965 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27966 the package documentation
27967 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27969 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27975 \begin_inset Newline newline
27986 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27993 \begin_layout Description
27995 \begin_inset space ~
27998 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28000 LatexCommand nameref
28001 reference "fig:Two-images"
28008 \begin_layout Description
28010 \begin_inset space ~
28013 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28014 label for the reference:
28015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28016 LatexCommand labelonly
28017 reference "fig:Two-images"
28022 \begin_inset Newline newline
28025 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28026 Code, if you want to issue a command
28027 that \SpecialChar LyX
28033 , then you may want to use the
28036 \begin_inset space ~
28041 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28051 This is the form needed for e.
28052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28056 \begin_inset space \space{}
28063 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28064 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28066 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28070 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28074 \begin_layout Standard
28075 You can only use the style
28079 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28083 is always possible.
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28087 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28088 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28090 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28091 \begin_inset space ~
28095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28097 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28104 \begin_layout Standard
28105 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28109 \begin_inset space ~
28113 \begin_inset space ~
28118 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28119 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28122 \begin_inset space ~
28127 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28128 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28131 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28138 You can change labels at any time.
28139 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28140 do not need to think about this.
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28144 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28146 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 References are described in detail in the section
28152 \begin_inset space ~
28162 \begin_inset space ~
28170 \begin_layout Section
28171 Table of Contents and other Listings
28172 \begin_inset Index idx
28175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 \begin_inset Index idx
28185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28186 Navigating ! Outline
28192 \begin_inset Index idx
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28211 \begin_layout Subsection
28213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28215 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28222 \begin_layout Standard
28223 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28225 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28226 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28228 \begin_inset space ~
28232 \begin_inset space ~
28238 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28240 If you click on it, the
28244 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28245 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28246 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28248 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28250 \begin_inset space ~
28255 that is described in section
28256 \begin_inset space ~
28260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28262 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28270 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28271 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28273 \begin_inset space ~
28277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28279 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28283 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28285 \begin_inset space ~
28289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28291 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28295 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28297 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28300 \begin_layout Subsection
28301 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28304 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28312 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28314 You can insert them via the
28316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28320 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28323 \begin_layout Section
28324 URLs and Hyperlinks
28325 \begin_inset Index idx
28328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28335 \begin_inset Index idx
28338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 \begin_layout Subsection
28349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28367 \begin_layout Standard
28368 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28370 \begin_inset Flex URL
28373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28375 https://www.lyx.org
28383 \begin_layout Standard
28384 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28390 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28394 \begin_layout Standard
28395 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28412 \begin_layout Subsection
28414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28416 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28423 \begin_layout Standard
28424 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28429 or with the toolbar button
28436 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28445 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28446 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28449 name "LyX's homepage"
28450 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28455 , an Email address like this:
28456 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28458 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28459 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28465 , or a link to a file.
28470 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28478 \begin_layout Standard
28479 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28492 to the link target.
28495 \begin_layout Standard
28496 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28497 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28498 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28499 the text style dialog.
28500 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28506 name "LyX's homepage"
28507 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28515 \begin_layout Standard
28516 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28520 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28523 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28527 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28529 \begin_inset Newline newline
28537 \begin_inset Newline newline
28544 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28547 \begin_layout Section
28549 \begin_inset Index idx
28552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28561 name "sec:Appendices"
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 Appendices are created with the menu
28571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28573 \begin_inset space ~
28577 \begin_inset space ~
28583 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28584 as the appendix part of the book.
28585 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28588 \begin_layout Standard
28589 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28590 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28591 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28592 and the subsection number.
28593 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28597 \begin_layout Standard
28599 \begin_inset space ~
28603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28605 reference "chap:Credits"
28610 \begin_inset space ~
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28616 reference "subsec:Export"
28623 \begin_layout Section
28625 \begin_inset Index idx
28628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28637 name "sec:Bibliography"
28644 \begin_layout Standard
28645 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28647 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28648 \begin_inset space ~
28652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28654 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28661 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28666 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28667 \begin_inset space ~
28671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28673 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28678 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28679 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28680 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28684 using a bibliography database.
28687 \begin_layout Standard
28688 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28689 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28693 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28694 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28695 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28696 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28697 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28700 \begin_layout Subsection
28701 The Bibliography Environment
28702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28704 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28711 \begin_layout Standard
28716 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28718 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28727 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28729 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28730 of ASCII characters only.
28734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28739 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28745 \begin_inset Newline newline
28749 \begin_inset Flex URL
28752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28754 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28766 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28776 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28777 \begin_inset Newline newline
28784 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28785 the number of the entry.
28790 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28799 \begin_layout Standard
28800 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28805 or the toolbar button
28808 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28812 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28813 containing the available citations.
28814 Select one or more keys from the list and
28824 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28825 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28829 \begin_layout Standard
28830 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28831 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28832 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28844 \begin_layout Standard
28848 Companion Second Edition
28851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28853 key "latexcompanion"
28861 \begin_layout Standard
28862 The \SpecialChar LyX
28863 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28864 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28874 \begin_layout Standard
28875 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28882 \begin_inset Index idx
28885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28893 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28905 Author A and Author B(Year)
28906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28913 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28915 Then, if you select
28918 \begin_inset space ~
28923 in the document settings
28924 \begin_inset Index idx
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28928 Document ! Settings
28935 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28937 \begin_inset space ~
28943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28945 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28952 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28955 \begin_layout Standard
28956 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28961 \begin_inset space ~
28969 arg "layout-paragraph"
28973 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28976 \begin_layout Subsection
28977 Bibliography databases
28978 \begin_inset Index idx
28981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28982 Bibliography ! Databases
28988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28990 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28997 \begin_layout Standard
28998 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29004 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29006 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29007 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29012 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29014 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29015 your working field in a database.
29016 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29017 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29018 list for that document.
29019 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29023 \begin_layout Standard
29024 The database is a text file with the file extension
29025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29036 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29037 The format is explained in
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29045 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29047 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29049 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29055 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29056 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29057 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29059 \begin_inset Flex URL
29062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29064 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29072 \begin_layout Standard
29074 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29075 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29076 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29078 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29080 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29081 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29082 Those are addressed by
29087 \begin_inset Index idx
29090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29092 packages ! biblatex
29098 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29099 (although it has been significantly
29100 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29110 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29111 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29112 might conversely fail to correctly
29113 handle databases that use specific
29122 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29132 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
29134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29138 \begin_inset Index idx
29141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29142 Document ! Settings
29154 \begin_inset space ~
29159 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29168 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29170 \begin_inset Index idx
29173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29174 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29183 \begin_layout Standard
29184 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29192 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29194 \begin_inset space ~
29200 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29201 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29209 Add bibliography to TOC
29211 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29216 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29217 in the document or just the cited references.
29220 \begin_layout Standard
29221 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29222 style file is a text file with the file extension
29223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29234 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29235 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29236 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29237 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29239 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29245 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29246 \begin_inset Newline newline
29250 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29252 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29262 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29267 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29272 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29277 \begin_inset Index idx
29280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29281 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29287 \begin_inset Index idx
29290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29292 packages ! biblatex
29300 \begin_layout Standard
29301 Accessing a database via
29305 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29313 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29315 \begin_inset space ~
29321 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29322 you cannot select a
29327 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29331 \begin_layout Standard
29336 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29349 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29350 file (text file with the file extension
29351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29362 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29363 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29365 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29374 styles are not set in the
29377 \begin_inset space ~
29382 dialog, but in the document settings.
29383 \begin_inset Index idx
29386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29387 Document ! Settings
29392 However, in the dialog in the
29396 field, which is only visible if you use
29400 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29401 example how its heading will appear).
29402 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29407 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29417 \begin_layout Standard
29418 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29419 \begin_inset space ~
29423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29425 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29436 Bibliography Processors
29439 \begin_layout Standard
29440 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29441 uses a bibliography processor,
29442 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29443 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29444 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29446 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29447 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29450 \begin_layout Standard
29451 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29453 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29454 You can do this on a general level in
29456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29457 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29458 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29461 or for individual documents in
29463 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29464 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29468 The following variants are available by default:
29471 \begin_layout Description
29472 biber a specific, modern processor
29473 \begin_inset Index idx
29476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29483 developed exclusively for
29487 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29493 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29498 makes use of; if you use the
29502 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29509 \begin_layout Description
29510 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29511 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29512 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29516 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29519 \begin_layout Description
29520 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29521 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29525 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29529 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29533 features are supported.
29536 \begin_layout Standard
29537 By default (with the
29543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29544 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29557 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29558 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29559 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29562 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29563 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29576 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29577 -based bibliography styles).
29578 This should suit most needs.
29581 \begin_layout Standard
29582 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29583 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29584 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29589 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29590 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29591 You can adjust it in
29593 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29594 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29595 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29601 \begin_layout Standard
29602 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29603 can add below the selection.
29604 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29605 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29611 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29625 \begin_layout Standard
29627 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29629 These are explained in detail in section
29631 Customizing Bibliographies
29635 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29640 Additional Features
29645 \begin_layout Subsection
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29651 Bibliography ! Citation format
29657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29659 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29666 \begin_layout Standard
29667 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29672 \begin_inset space \space{}
29675 numerical citation (as
29676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29683 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29691 ) or author-year citations (as
29692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29701 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29705 \begin_layout Standard
29706 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29714 \begin_inset Index idx
29717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29718 Document ! Settings
29723 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29729 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29730 labels, is there to use
29733 \begin_inset space ~
29744 \begin_inset space ~
29749 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29752 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 With a bibliography database (see
29761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29763 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29770 ) one has in contrary to the
29774 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29775 These style formats are available:
29778 \begin_layout Description
29780 \begin_inset space ~
29783 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29784 -based approached without any additional packages
29785 (simple numeric citations).
29788 \begin_layout Description
29789 Biblatex loads the package
29794 \begin_inset Index idx
29797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29799 packages ! biblatex
29804 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29806 Biblatex citation style
29810 Biblatex bibliography style
29813 Options to the package
29817 can be entered in the
29824 \begin_layout Description
29826 \begin_inset space ~
29830 \begin_inset space ~
29833 mode) loads the package
29837 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29838 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29850 behavior very closely.
29855 this option has some additional styles.
29860 styles are also supported by this variant.
29863 \begin_layout Description
29865 \begin_inset space ~
29868 (BibTeX) loads the package
29873 \begin_inset Index idx
29876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29883 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29886 \begin_layout Description
29888 \begin_inset space ~
29891 (BibTeX) loads the package
29896 \begin_inset Index idx
29899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29906 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29909 \begin_layout Standard
29918 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29920 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29929 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29931 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29932 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29934 Biblatex citation style
29937 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29943 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29948 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29949 are available in the
29954 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29955 a name prefix such as
29956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29971 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29976 \begin_inset space \space{}
29980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29998 \begin_inset space \space{}
30001 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30007 \begin_inset space \space{}
30011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30023 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30041 Here is a simple example where the text
30042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30046 \begin_inset space ~
30050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30053 appears after the reference:
30056 \begin_layout Quote
30058 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30061 key "latexcompanion"
30069 \begin_layout Standard
30070 All styles except for
30074 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30084 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30089 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30090 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
30091 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
30096 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
30097 multi-citation (so-called
30098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30101 qualified citation lists
30102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30108 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
30113 dialog will display three columns in the field
30120 \begin_inset space ~
30128 \begin_inset space ~
30136 \begin_inset space ~
30142 If you double-click on an item's
30145 \begin_inset space ~
30153 \begin_inset space ~
30158 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30161 General text before
30167 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30170 \begin_layout Section
30172 \begin_inset Index idx
30175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30191 \begin_layout Standard
30192 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30196 \begin_inset space ~
30201 or the toolbar button
30208 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30209 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30210 by \SpecialChar LyX
30211 as the index entry.
30214 \begin_layout Standard
30215 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30218 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30220 \begin_inset space ~
30226 A light blue box labeled
30227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30238 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30239 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30243 \begin_layout Standard
30244 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30245 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30246 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30247 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30249 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30251 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30259 \begin_layout Subsection
30260 Grouping Index Entries
30261 \begin_inset Index idx
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30273 \begin_layout Standard
30274 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30276 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30277 lists under the entry
30278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30286 First we create the entry
30287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30295 \begin_inset space ~
30299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30301 reference "subsec:Lists"
30306 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30307 \begin_inset space ~
30311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30313 reference "sec:Itemize"
30317 , we insert the command
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30330 \begin_layout Standard
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 for the enumerated list in section
30338 \begin_inset space ~
30342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30344 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 The exclamation mark
30353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30360 marks the grouping levels.
30361 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30362 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30363 If we don't have an index entry for
30364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30371 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30374 \begin_layout Subsection
30376 \begin_inset Index idx
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 Index ! Page ranges
30388 \begin_layout Standard
30389 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30391 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30392 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30393 an index entry in section
30394 \begin_inset space ~
30398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30400 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30407 \begin_layout Standard
30410 Paragraph environments|(
30413 \begin_layout Standard
30414 and another entry at the end of section
30415 \begin_inset space ~
30419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30421 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30431 Paragraph environments|)
30434 \begin_layout Standard
30436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30459 respectively start and end the index range.
30460 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30461 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30462 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30463 An example is the index entry
30464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30467 Document ! Settings
30468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30474 \begin_layout Subsection
30476 \begin_inset Index idx
30479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30480 Index ! Cross referencing
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30490 We referred for example in the index entry
30491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30499 \begin_inset space ~
30503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30505 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30509 ) to the index entry
30510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30517 in the same section using the entry
30520 \begin_layout Standard
30523 GIF|see{Image formats}
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30529 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30530 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30533 \begin_layout Subsection
30535 \begin_inset Index idx
30538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30539 Index ! Entry order
30547 \begin_layout Standard
30548 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30549 follow the rules for the index order.
30550 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30556 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30564 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30573 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30574 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30599 \begin_inset Index idx
30602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30603 Dummy entries ! maïs
30609 \begin_inset Index idx
30612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30613 Dummy entries ! maître
30619 \begin_inset Index idx
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30623 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30628 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30629 maïs, maison, maître.
30630 To achieve this, we use the command
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30636 previous entry@current entry
30639 \begin_layout Standard
30640 In our case we want to have
30641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30656 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30665 \begin_layout Standard
30666 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30667 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30669 See the next subsection for an example.
30672 \begin_layout Subsection
30674 \begin_inset Index idx
30677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30678 Index ! Entry layout
30686 \begin_layout Standard
30687 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30688 \begin_inset Index idx
30691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 This is an italic dummy entry
30699 You can also format the page number using the character
30700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30707 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30708 -command without a backslash.
30709 We can write for example
30712 \begin_layout Standard
30715 italic page number:|textit
30718 \begin_layout Standard
30719 to get the page number in italic.
30720 \begin_inset Index idx
30723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30724 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30729 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30730 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30748 \begin_inset space ~
30754 Have a look at section
30755 \begin_inset space ~
30759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30761 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30765 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30782 to generate the index, see section
30783 \begin_inset space ~
30787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30789 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30798 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30803 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30807 key "latexcompanion"
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30821 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30823 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30824 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30825 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30826 If so, put the following in the preamble
30829 \begin_layout Standard
30841 \begin_layout Standard
30845 \begin_layout Standard
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 in the index entry.
30853 \begin_inset Index idx
30856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30857 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30862 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30863 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30864 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30869 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30870 a bold font for all index entries.
30871 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30883 documentation for details,
30884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30886 key "makeindex,xindy"
30894 \begin_layout Subsection
30896 \begin_inset Index idx
30899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30906 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30908 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30916 If the index generation program
30920 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30921 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30925 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30926 distribution, is used.
30930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30935 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30936 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30937 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30938 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30939 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30949 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30951 dialog, see section
30952 \begin_inset space ~
30956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30958 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30963 The available options are listed and explained in
30964 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30966 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30972 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30976 \begin_layout Standard
30977 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30978 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30982 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30986 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30987 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30990 \begin_layout Subsection
30994 \begin_layout Standard
30995 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30996 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31004 next to the standard index.
31006 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31007 that add this feature.
31014 \begin_inset Index idx
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31019 packages ! splitidx
31024 package to generate multiple indexes.
31025 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31031 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31033 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31041 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31042 style, but it also includes
31043 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31044 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31052 \begin_layout Standard
31053 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31054 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31060 and select the option
31062 Use multiple Indexes
31069 already contains the standard index
31070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31078 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31079 also appear as a heading) to the
31083 input field and press the
31088 The new index now also appears in the list.
31089 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31090 label color to the new index.
31093 \begin_layout Standard
31094 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31104 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31105 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31106 are additional features:
31109 \begin_layout Itemize
31110 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31111 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31114 \begin_layout Itemize
31115 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31116 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31121 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31122 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31123 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31124 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31127 \begin_layout Itemize
31132 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
31133 code in the name of the index.
31136 \begin_layout Section
31137 Nomenclature/Glossary
31138 \begin_inset Index idx
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31148 \begin_inset Index idx
31151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31182 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31189 \begin_layout Standard
31190 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31191 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31192 called nomenclature or glossary.
31195 \begin_layout Standard
31196 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31203 \begin_inset Index idx
31206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31214 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31216 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31223 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31227 \begin_layout Standard
31228 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31229 and then use the menu
31231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31237 \begin_inset space ~
31242 or the toolbar button
31245 arg "nomencl-insert"
31250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31261 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31266 The first is the term or
31270 that you wish to define.
31275 of the term or symbol.
31278 \begin_layout Standard
31279 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31288 code for nomenclature entries the option
31292 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31300 \begin_layout Subsection
31301 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31302 \begin_inset Index idx
31305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31306 Nomenclature ! Layout
31314 \begin_layout Standard
31315 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31319 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31326 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31334 \begin_inset Newline newline
31342 \begin_inset Newline newline
31348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31355 character starts/ends the formula.
31356 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31357 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31369 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31381 syntax is given in section
31382 \begin_inset space ~
31386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31388 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31395 \begin_layout Standard
31399 \begin_inset space ~
31404 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31406 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31411 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31418 in this document is:
31419 \begin_inset Newline newline
31424 dummy entry for the character
31429 \begin_inset Newline newline
31441 \begin_inset space ~
31451 font use the command
31480 \begin_layout Standard
31481 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31486 \begin_inset space \space{}
31490 \begin_inset Newline newline
31506 \begin_inset Newline newline
31509 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31510 This command will make the font of all symbols
31517 \begin_inset space ~
31525 \begin_layout Standard
31526 If the characters |
31527 \begin_inset space \space{}
31531 \begin_inset space \space{}
31535 \begin_inset space \space{}
31539 \begin_inset space \space{}
31543 \begin_inset space \space{}
31546 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31547 code they need to be escaped
31548 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31549 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31550 LatexCommand nomenclature
31551 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31552 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31560 \begin_layout Subsection
31561 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31562 \begin_inset Index idx
31565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31566 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31574 \begin_layout Standard
31575 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31576 -code of the symbol
31578 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31580 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31583 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31584 LatexCommand nomenclature
31586 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31594 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31598 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31599 LatexCommand nomenclature
31602 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31608 They will be sorted by
31609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31635 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31638 will be sorted before the
31642 since the character
31643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31650 is considered in sorting.
31653 \begin_layout Standard
31654 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31657 \begin_inset space ~
31662 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31663 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31665 For the example given, you can insert
31669 in this field for the
31670 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31677 will be located before
31678 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31684 \begin_layout Standard
31685 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31690 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31700 \begin_layout Subsection
31701 Nomenclature Options
31702 \begin_inset Index idx
31705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31706 Nomenclature ! Options
31712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31714 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31726 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31727 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31730 \begin_layout Description
31731 refeq Appends the phrase
31732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31747 to every nomenclature entry, where
31753 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31756 \begin_layout Description
31757 refpage Appends the phrase
31758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31773 to every nomenclature entry, where
31779 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31782 \begin_layout Description
31783 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31788 class options list in the
31790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31794 In this document the options
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31802 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31808 \begin_layout Standard
31809 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31810 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31815 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31818 \begin_layout Description
31828 \begin_layout Description
31831 nomrefpage Like the
31838 \begin_layout Description
31841 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31850 \begin_layout Description
31854 \begin_inset space ~
31860 \begin_inset space ~
31865 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31868 \begin_layout Standard
31870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31877 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31878 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31891 \begin_inset Newline newline
31897 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31901 \begin_inset space ~
31913 unskip, see equation
31916 \begin_inset Newline newline
31923 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31924 \begin_inset Newline newline
31930 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31934 \begin_inset space ~
31951 \begin_layout Standard
31952 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31960 in the document settings under
31963 \begin_inset space ~
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31979 \begin_inset Newline newline
31983 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31987 \begin_inset space ~
31999 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32001 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32002 \begin_inset Newline newline
32009 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32010 \begin_inset Newline newline
32014 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32018 \begin_inset space ~
32030 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32035 \begin_layout Subsection
32036 Printing the Nomenclature
32037 \begin_inset Index idx
32040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32041 Nomenclature ! Printing
32049 \begin_layout Standard
32050 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32053 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32069 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32070 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32071 You can choose between these settings:
32074 \begin_layout Description
32075 Default a space of 1
32076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32082 \begin_layout Description
32084 \begin_inset space ~
32088 \begin_inset space ~
32091 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32094 \begin_layout Description
32095 Custom custom space
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32116 For example, in order to change the name to
32120 , add the following line to the preamble:
32123 \begin_layout Standard
32131 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32134 \begin_layout Subsection
32135 Nomenclature Program
32136 \begin_inset Index idx
32139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32140 Nomenclature ! Program
32146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32148 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32161 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32162 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32164 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32169 by adding options, see section
32170 \begin_inset space ~
32174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32176 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32181 The available options are listed and explained in
32182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32184 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32192 \begin_layout Section
32194 \begin_inset Index idx
32197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32204 \begin_inset Index idx
32207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32208 Document ! Branches
32214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32216 name "sec:Branches"
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32225 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32226 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32227 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32230 \begin_layout Standard
32231 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32232 allows you to put text into branches.
32233 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32234 To create a branch, either select the menu
32236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32237 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32240 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32249 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32250 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32251 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32252 and whether the name of the branch should
32253 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32254 (see below for an example).
32255 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32256 to the name of the other) and to add
32257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32269 \begin_inset space ~
32272 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32273 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32276 \begin_layout Standard
32277 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32278 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32283 where you can choose a branch.
32284 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32289 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32290 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 \begin_inset Branch Question
32298 \begin_layout Standard
32303 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32311 \begin_layout Standard
32312 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32316 \begin_layout Standard
32321 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32329 \begin_layout Standard
32336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32337 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32340 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32341 Consider for example a file
32342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32349 which has the above branches.
32351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32358 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32382 branch were inactive,
32383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32398 branch was active, likewise
32399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32414 branch was active, and
32415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32418 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32422 if both branches were active.
32423 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32424 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32430 \begin_layout Standard
32431 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32437 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32438 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32442 \begin_inset space ~
32450 \begin_layout Standard
32451 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32455 \begin_layout Standard
32461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32468 branch is deactivated.
32474 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32480 \begin_layout Standard
32481 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32482 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32483 definitions for each branch.
32484 For example you can define for the question branch
32488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32489 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32490 -syntax, see section
32491 \begin_inset space ~
32495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32497 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32509 \begin_layout Standard
32519 \begin_layout Standard
32529 \begin_layout Standard
32530 and for the answer branch
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32543 \begin_layout Standard
32553 \begin_layout Standard
32554 \begin_inset Branch Question
32558 \begin_layout Standard
32562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32590 \begin_layout Standard
32591 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32627 \begin_layout Standard
32628 Now it is possible to use the
32632 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32639 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32642 commands to obtain conditional output.
32643 Here is an example formula where only the
32650 \begin_inset Formula
32652 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32660 \begin_layout Standard
32661 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32669 \begin_layout Standard
32670 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32676 \begin_inset space \space{}
32679 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32681 For this advanced usage, see the
32687 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32692 \begin_layout Section
32694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32696 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32701 \begin_inset Index idx
32704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 \begin_layout Standard
32716 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32717 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32720 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32722 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32728 \begin_inset Index idx
32731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32733 packages ! hyperref
32738 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32739 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32740 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32741 part of the document.
32745 \begin_layout Standard
32746 The header information in the dialog tab
32750 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32751 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32752 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32753 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32757 \begin_inset space ~
32761 \begin_inset space ~
32766 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32767 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32768 and author entries.
32772 \begin_inset space ~
32776 \begin_inset space ~
32780 \begin_inset space ~
32785 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32788 \begin_layout Standard
32789 You can specify in the dialog tab
32793 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32798 \begin_inset space ~
32802 \begin_inset space ~
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32811 option allows long links to be split;
32814 \begin_inset space ~
32818 \begin_inset space ~
32822 \begin_inset space ~
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32835 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32838 \begin_inset space ~
32843 colors the different links.
32844 The default colors are:
32847 \begin_layout Labeling
32848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32853 for hyperlinks and URLs
32856 \begin_layout Labeling
32857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32865 \begin_layout Labeling
32866 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32875 but you can change these in the field
32880 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32883 \begin_layout Standard
32886 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32894 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32895 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32896 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32899 \begin_layout Standard
32904 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32905 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32906 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32916 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32917 when opening the PDF.
32919 \begin_inset space ~
32922 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32923 \begin_inset space ~
32926 1 will only display the sections.
32929 \begin_layout Standard
32930 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32931 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32937 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32938 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32948 \begin_layout Section
32950 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32954 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32961 \begin_layout Subsection
32964 \begin_inset Index idx
32967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32977 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32985 As \SpecialChar LyX
32986 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32987 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32988 commands and constructs,
32991 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32992 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32993 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32994 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32995 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32996 cannot support all packages and
33000 \begin_layout Standard
33001 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33002 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33003 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33007 Code box is created by the menu
33009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33011 \begin_inset space ~
33016 or by the toolbar button
33029 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33037 \begin_layout Standard
33038 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33040 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33042 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33047 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33052 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33059 , you can write the command part
33065 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33066 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33070 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33071 Code box behind the word.
33072 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33073 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33077 \begin_layout Standard
33078 \begin_inset Graphics
33079 filename clipart/ERT.png
33087 \begin_layout Standard
33091 \begin_layout Standard
33092 This is a line with a
33096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33119 \begin_layout Standard
33120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33128 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33129 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33130 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33131 know that the command is finished.
33139 \begin_layout Subsection
33140 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33142 \begin_inset Argument 1
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33153 \begin_inset Index idx
33156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33166 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33173 \begin_layout Standard
33174 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33175 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33176 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33177 uses in the background.
33178 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33179 is based on commands, you can
33180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33188 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33189 any time if you know the right commands.
33190 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33191 is the end of the day.
33192 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33193 all caption labels bold.
33194 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33196 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33200 \begin_layout Standard
33201 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33203 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33205 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33208 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33218 \begin_layout Standard
33219 As result you find that the package
33224 \begin_inset Index idx
33227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33235 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33240 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33252 \begin_layout Standard
33257 usepackage[options]{package name}
33260 \begin_layout Standard
33261 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33262 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33263 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33264 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33267 \begin_layout Standard
33268 In your case the package name is
33273 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33278 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33279 So you add the command
33282 \begin_layout Standard
33287 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33290 \begin_layout Standard
33291 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33296 For more commands provided by the
33300 package, have a look at its documentation,
33301 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33316 \begin_layout Standard
33317 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33319 For example if you use a
33323 class, you don't need the package
33327 , you can instead write
33330 \begin_layout Standard
33335 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33342 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33343 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33350 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33353 \begin_layout Standard
33354 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33355 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33357 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33358 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33359 Code box as described in the previous
33363 \begin_layout Standard
33364 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33365 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33370 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33379 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33385 \begin_layout Standard
33389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33399 \begin_inset Note Note
33402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33411 \begin_layout Left Header
33412 \begin_inset Argument 1
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33435 \begin_inset Note Note
33438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 defines the header line as described below
33447 \begin_layout Center Header
33448 \begin_inset Argument 1
33451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33460 \begin_layout Right Header
33461 \begin_inset Argument 1
33464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 \begin_layout Left Footer
33486 \begin_inset Argument 1
33489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33510 \begin_layout Center Footer
33511 \begin_inset Argument 1
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33526 \begin_inset Newline newline
33530 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33536 \begin_layout Right Footer
33537 \begin_inset Argument 1
33540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33562 \begin_layout Section
33563 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33566 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33571 \begin_inset Index idx
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33575 Document ! Header/Footer line
33581 \begin_inset Index idx
33584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33598 \begin_inset space ~
33609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33621 As a second step add in the menu
33623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33633 Custom Header/Footerlines
33636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33640 This module offers the following 6
33641 \begin_inset space ~
33647 \begin_layout Description
33649 \begin_inset space ~
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33657 \begin_inset space ~
33661 \begin_inset space ~
33665 \begin_inset space ~
33671 \begin_layout Description
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33677 \begin_inset space ~
33681 \begin_inset space ~
33685 \begin_inset space ~
33689 \begin_inset space ~
33695 \begin_layout Standard
33696 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33697 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33700 \begin_layout Standard
33701 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33702 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33704 \begin_inset space ~
33708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33710 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33714 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33718 \begin_inset Float figure
33724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33727 \begin_inset Tabular
33728 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33729 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33730 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33731 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33732 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33734 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33752 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33781 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33792 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 The normal text on the page goes here.
33797 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33799 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33800 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33805 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33872 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33890 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33895 name "fig:Page-layout"
33899 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33930 is set to “Default”.
33931 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33940 \begin_layout Subsection
33944 \begin_layout Standard
33945 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33946 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33947 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33948 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33950 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33952 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33957 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33963 \begin_inset space ~
33971 \begin_layout Description
33974 thepage prints the current page number
33977 \begin_layout Description
33980 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33983 \begin_layout Description
33986 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33989 \begin_layout Description
33992 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33993 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34000 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34003 because it usually goes in a left header.
34006 \begin_layout Description
34009 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34010 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34012 It is normally used in the right header.
34015 \begin_layout Subsection
34016 Default header/footer
34019 \begin_layout Standard
34020 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34021 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34022 footer has the page number.
34023 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34024 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34025 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34036 \begin_layout Subsection
34040 \begin_layout Standard
34041 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34042 Some pages are different.
34043 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34044 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34045 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34046 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34047 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34051 Header and footer decoration line
34054 \begin_layout Standard
34055 By default, you get a 0.4
34056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34059 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34060 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34072 in the following way:
34075 \begin_layout Standard
34082 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34085 \begin_layout Standard
34086 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34099 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34106 \begin_layout Standard
34107 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34109 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34114 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34125 Several header/footer lines
34128 \begin_layout Standard
34129 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34130 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34131 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34133 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34149 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34151 \begin_inset space ~
34159 \begin_layout Standard
34166 headheight}{height}
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34174 is a size in standard units (e.
34175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34179 \begin_inset space \space{}
34187 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34188 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34189 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34190 logfile with the menu
34192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34194 \begin_inset space ~
34202 \begin_inset space ~
34207 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34212 \begin_inset Index idx
34215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34217 packages ! fancyhdr
34223 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34224 for your header/footer.
34227 \begin_layout Subsection
34231 \begin_layout Standard
34232 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34233 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34234 This example consists of the following definition:
34237 \begin_layout Description
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34248 , empty optional argument
34251 \begin_layout Description
34253 \begin_inset space ~
34256 Header empty, empty optional argument
34259 \begin_layout Description
34261 \begin_inset space ~
34270 in the optional argument
34273 \begin_layout Description
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34284 in the optional argument
34287 \begin_layout Description
34289 \begin_inset space ~
34302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34306 \begin_inset Newline newline
34310 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34317 in the optional argument
34320 \begin_layout Description
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34331 , empty optional argument
34334 \begin_layout Description
34337 headrulewidth set to 2
34338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34346 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34352 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34362 \begin_layout Standard
34363 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 pagestyle{headings}
34383 \begin_inset Note Note
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34387 switches back to page style with the default headings
34395 \begin_layout Section
34396 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34399 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34404 \begin_inset Index idx
34407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 \begin_inset Index idx
34417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34426 \begin_layout Standard
34428 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34429 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34430 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34433 \begin_layout Subsection
34437 \begin_layout Standard
34438 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34444 \begin_inset Index idx
34447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34449 packages ! preview-latex
34454 (on some systems named simply
34459 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34461 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34468 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34470 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34478 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34479 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34480 -package are automatically
34481 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34485 \begin_layout Subsection
34489 \begin_layout Standard
34490 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34491 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34493 activate the option
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34509 \begin_inset space ~
34513 \begin_inset space ~
34516 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34523 \begin_inset space ~
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34541 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34544 \begin_layout Standard
34545 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34558 \begin_inset space ~
34566 \begin_layout Standard
34567 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34568 and when you finish
34572 \begin_layout Standard
34573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34581 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34582 generated by activating the option
34585 \begin_inset space ~
34591 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34599 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 Selected document parts
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34604 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34605 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34606 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34607 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34609 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34615 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34616 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34617 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34620 \begin_layout Standard
34621 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34628 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34640 is explained in section
34642 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34647 \begin_inset space ~
34657 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34658 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34659 the final rotated boxes,
34660 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34661 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34663 Here is the result:
34666 \begin_layout Standard
34667 \begin_inset Preview
34669 \begin_layout Standard
34674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34678 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34684 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34694 height_special "totalheight"
34699 backgroundcolor "none"
34702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34727 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34733 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 \begin_layout Standard
34756 Previewing works also for colors.
34757 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34776 is explained in section
34783 \begin_inset space ~
34796 \begin_layout Standard
34797 \begin_inset Preview
34799 \begin_layout Standard
34803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34822 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34827 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34853 \begin_layout Standard
34854 If \SpecialChar LyX
34855 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34856 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34857 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34858 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34859 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34860 the \SpecialChar TeX
34862 If \SpecialChar LyX
34863 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34864 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34866 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34867 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34868 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34871 \begin_layout Subsection
34876 \begin_layout Standard
34877 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34878 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34881 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34883 \begin_inset space ~
34888 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34890 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34892 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34893 's main window, then only this selection
34894 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34895 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34896 the source view window.
34901 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34902 ; but note that if you have
34903 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34905 not just the one which is open at the time.
34908 \begin_layout Section
34909 Advanced Find and Replace
34910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34912 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34917 \begin_inset Index idx
34920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 \begin_inset Index idx
34930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34939 \begin_layout Subsection
34943 \begin_layout Standard
34944 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34945 allows for searching of complex,
34946 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34948 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34949 The key-features are:
34952 \begin_layout Itemize
34953 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34954 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34955 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34959 \begin_layout Itemize
34960 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34961 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34962 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34963 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34966 \begin_layout Itemize
34967 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34968 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34969 outside of mathematics environments
34972 \begin_layout Itemize
34973 Search may be widened to a specific
34978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34985 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34986 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34993 \begin_layout Itemize
34994 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34995 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35003 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35006 \begin_layout Subsection
35010 \begin_layout Standard
35011 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35013 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35026 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35029 ) or the toolbar button
35032 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35038 Advanced Find and Replace
35043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35053 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35062 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35065 arg "paragraph-break"
35069 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35070 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35074 arg "paragraph-break"
35077 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35081 searches backwards.
35084 \begin_layout Standard
35088 \begin_inset space ~
35093 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35107 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35111 Searching for mathematics
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35115 Mathematical formulas, such as
35116 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35119 or something more complex like
35120 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35123 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35128 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35129 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35130 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35131 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35143 This is done by switching to the
35147 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35152 This way, entering in the
35159 \begin_layout Itemize
35160 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35161 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35164 \begin_layout Itemize
35165 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35166 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35169 \begin_layout Itemize
35170 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35171 of it only within section headings.
35172 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35173 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35177 \begin_layout Itemize
35178 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35179 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35186 \begin_layout Standard
35187 The entries made in the
35191 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35200 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35204 button or alternatively press
35207 arg "paragraph-break"
35214 while the cursor is in the
35217 \begin_inset space ~
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35228 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35232 \begin_layout Itemize
35233 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35234 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35242 with its typewriter version
35243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35257 \begin_layout Itemize
35258 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35264 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35276 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35283 (you may want to enable the
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35299 options and disable the
35307 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35315 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35316 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35320 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35323 , or occurrences of
35324 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35328 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35334 \begin_layout Subsection
35338 \begin_layout Standard
35339 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35344 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35346 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35348 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35358 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35364 This is done with the context menu
35366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35367 Insert Regular Expression
35369 while the cursor is in the
35374 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35375 expression matching rules
35379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35387 \begin_inset space ~
35390 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35391 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35397 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35398 same text in the document.
35399 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35400 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35403 \begin_layout Enumerate
35404 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35409 editor the fraction
35410 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35414 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35417 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35418 fractions with the given denominator.
35421 \begin_layout Enumerate
35422 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35434 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35439 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35440 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35441 Also, by inserting a
35442 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35445 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35446 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35449 \begin_layout Standard
35450 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35451 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35452 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35455 , and referring back to them through
35456 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35460 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35464 For example, try searching with the regexp
35465 \begin_inset Newline newline
35468 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35471 \begin_inset Newline newline
35474 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35477 \begin_layout Standard
35478 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35490 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35491 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35492 sub-expressions is absolute.
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35498 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35501 always refers to the first occurrence of
35502 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35505 in all entered regexps.
35513 \begin_layout Section
35515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35517 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35522 \begin_inset Index idx
35525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35536 has a built-in spell checker.
35539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35546 key or the toolbar button
35549 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35552 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35553 beginning of the currently selected text.
35554 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35555 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35556 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35557 scrolled so that it is visible.
35558 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35559 n, if any could be found.
35560 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35564 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35565 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35576 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35577 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35579 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35580 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35583 \begin_inset space ~
35591 arg "dialog-show character"
35594 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35596 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35599 \begin_layout Standard
35600 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35601 can be downloaded from here:
35602 \begin_inset Newline newline
35606 \begin_inset Flex URL
35609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35611 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35617 \begin_inset Newline newline
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35624 files for each language.
35625 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35626 \begin_inset space ~
35629 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35630 's installation subfolder
35638 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35640 \begin_inset Newline newline
35643 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35644 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35645 but in most cases these are
35661 is the language code.
35664 \begin_layout Subsection
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35672 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35674 \begin_inset space ~
35677 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35680 you can set the following things:
35683 \begin_layout Description
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35688 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35689 should use for spell checking.
35690 Depending on your platform,
35700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35701 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35702 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35720 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35723 \begin_layout Description
35725 \begin_inset space ~
35728 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35729 will always use the given language
35730 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35733 \begin_layout Description
35735 \begin_inset space ~
35738 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35744 \begin_inset space \space{}
35748 This should normally not be needed.
35751 \begin_layout Description
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35757 \begin_inset space ~
35760 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35772 \begin_layout Description
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35777 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35778 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35779 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35780 appear in a context menu.
35781 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35785 \begin_layout Description
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35791 \begin_inset space ~
35795 \begin_inset space ~
35798 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35802 \begin_layout Section
35804 \begin_inset Index idx
35807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35816 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35823 \begin_layout Standard
35825 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35826 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35836 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35838 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35848 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35850 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35851 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35852 which are available for many languages.
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35856 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35857 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35861 \begin_layout Subsection
35862 Setting up the thesaurus
35865 \begin_layout Standard
35874 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35878 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35883 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35889 \begin_inset space ~
35897 For instance, the US English files are named:
35900 \begin_layout Itemize
35904 \begin_layout Itemize
35908 \begin_layout Standard
35917 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35918 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35921 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35922 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35930 ) to the path where they are installed.
35934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35935 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35936 ies, typical locations are
35942 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35946 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35950 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35953 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35959 LibreOffice-<Version>
35966 On the Mac, the default location is
35968 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35969 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35970 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35971 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35972 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35973 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35981 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35982 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35983 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35987 \begin_layout Standard
35988 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35989 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35991 \begin_inset Newline newline
35995 \begin_inset Flex URL
35998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36000 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36008 \begin_layout Standard
36009 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36010 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36012 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36013 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36014 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36016 \begin_inset space ~
36021 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36023 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36024 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36028 \begin_layout Standard
36029 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36031 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36034 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36040 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36043 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36044 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36052 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36053 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36054 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36056 \begin_inset space ~
36061 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36064 \begin_layout Subsection
36065 Using the thesaurus
36068 \begin_layout Standard
36069 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36071 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36074 or the toolbar button
36077 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36080 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36082 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36084 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36085 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36086 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36095 ), related terms (such as
36098 \begin_inset space ~
36107 ), compounds (such as
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36119 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36128 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36131 \begin_layout Standard
36132 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36133 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36137 \begin_layout Standard
36138 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36139 the dictionary, such as the above
36143 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36148 \begin_inset space \space{}
36151 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36152 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36153 For example, looking up the word form
36157 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36162 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36167 \begin_inset space \space{}
36178 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36179 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36180 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36183 \begin_layout Section
36185 \begin_inset Index idx
36188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36195 \begin_inset Index idx
36198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36199 Document ! Change Tracking
36205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36207 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36214 \begin_layout Standard
36215 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36216 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36217 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36218 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36225 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36235 \begin_layout Standard
36236 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36250 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36251 You can change the color in
36253 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36254 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36256 \begin_inset space ~
36260 \begin_inset space ~
36265 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36271 \begin_inset Index idx
36274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36275 Color ! Change tracking
36280 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36281 's status bar when the
36282 cursor is in changed text.
36283 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36286 arg "changes-merge"
36292 \begin_layout Standard
36293 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36295 \begin_inset Index idx
36298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36308 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36314 \begin_layout Standard
36315 \begin_inset Graphics
36316 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36324 \begin_layout Standard
36325 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36335 \begin_layout Standard
36336 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36342 \begin_layout Standard
36343 \begin_inset Tabular
36344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36345 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36346 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36347 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36357 arg "changes-track"
36365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36376 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36396 arg "changes-output"
36404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36415 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset space ~
36434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36455 Jumps to the next change
36461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36470 arg "change-accept"
36478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36486 \begin_inset space ~
36489 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36509 arg "change-reject"
36517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36528 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36530 \begin_inset space ~
36539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36548 arg "changes-merge"
36556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36567 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36569 \begin_inset space ~
36578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36587 arg "all-changes-accept"
36595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36606 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36612 \begin_inset space ~
36621 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36630 arg "all-changes-reject"
36638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36644 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36649 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36655 \begin_inset space ~
36664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36687 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36688 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36722 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36740 \begin_layout Standard
36741 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36747 \begin_layout Standard
36748 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36768 \begin_layout Standard
36769 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36770 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36771 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36772 the next change after the current cursor position.
36773 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36774 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36775 step to the next change.
36776 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36779 \begin_layout Standard
36780 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36781 to describe a change.
36784 \begin_layout Standard
36785 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36791 \begin_inset Index idx
36794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36802 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36811 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36815 \begin_layout Section
36816 Comparison of Documents
36817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36819 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36824 \begin_inset Index idx
36827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36828 Comparison of documents
36836 \begin_layout Standard
36837 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36840 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36844 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36845 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36847 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36849 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36853 \begin_inset space ~
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36895 enables the change tracking option
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36911 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36914 \begin_layout Section
36915 International Support
36916 \begin_inset Index idx
36919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36920 International support
36928 \begin_layout Standard
36929 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36930 with any language you want.
36931 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36932 up \SpecialChar LyX
36934 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36936 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36945 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36946 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36947 \begin_inset space ~
36951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36953 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36960 \begin_layout Subsection
36962 \begin_inset Index idx
36965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36972 \begin_inset Index idx
36975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36976 Document ! Settings
36982 \begin_inset Index idx
36985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36986 Document ! Language
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36998 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37001 dialog lets you set
37003 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37013 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37023 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37024 For details about the different encoding options see section
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37031 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37038 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 Keyboard mapping configuration
37040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37042 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 If you have for example a U.
37051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37054 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37055 can use an alternate keymap.
37056 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37062 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37063 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37066 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37073 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37078 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37079 which one you want to use.
37082 \begin_layout Standard
37083 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37084 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37085 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37089 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37090 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37091 one to support the characters you want.
37092 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37099 \begin_layout Chapter
37102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37104 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37111 \begin_layout Standard
37112 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37113 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37114 topic inside the user's guide.
37117 \begin_layout Section
37119 \begin_inset Index idx
37122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37131 \begin_layout Standard
37136 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37139 \begin_layout Subsection
37143 \begin_layout Standard
37144 Creates a new document.
37147 \begin_layout Subsection
37151 \begin_layout Standard
37152 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37153 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37154 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37157 \begin_layout Subsection
37161 \begin_layout Standard
37165 \begin_layout Subsection
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37171 Click there on a file to open it.
37174 \begin_layout Subsection
37178 \begin_layout Standard
37179 Closes the current document.
37182 \begin_layout Subsection
37186 \begin_layout Standard
37187 Closes all opened documents.
37190 \begin_layout Subsection
37194 \begin_layout Standard
37195 Saves the actual document.
37198 \begin_layout Subsection
37202 \begin_layout Standard
37203 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Saves all opened documents.
37214 \begin_layout Subsection
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37219 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37222 \begin_layout Subsection
37226 \begin_layout Standard
37227 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37228 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37229 It is described in the section
37231 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37236 Additional Features
37241 \begin_layout Subsection
37245 \begin_layout Standard
37246 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37247 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37249 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37250 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 When using the menu entry
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37263 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37275 \begin_inset space ~
37280 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37281 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37284 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37288 name "subsec:Export"
37295 \begin_layout Standard
37296 You can export your document to various file formats.
37297 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37299 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37300 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37301 during its configuration.
37304 \begin_layout Standard
37305 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37313 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37320 \begin_layout Description
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37329 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37334 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37335 \begin_inset Newline newline
37338 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37339 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37343 \begin_layout Description
37344 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37350 \begin_layout Description
37352 \begin_inset space ~
37355 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37361 \begin_layout Description
37362 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37363 's native DVI-format.
37364 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37365 files paths or file names in your document.
37367 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37374 \begin_layout Description
37375 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37376 in files paths or file names
37379 \begin_layout Description
37381 \begin_inset space ~
37388 ) DVI-format using the program
37390 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37393 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37405 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37413 \begin_layout Description
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37418 (cropped) the same as
37422 but with cropped page margins.
37425 \begin_layout Description
37427 \begin_inset space ~
37430 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37434 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37439 \begin_layout Description
37443 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37451 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37459 \begin_layout Description
37461 \begin_inset space ~
37465 \begin_inset space ~
37468 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37472 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37480 \begin_layout Description
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37493 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37494 source that is compilable with the program
37496 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37500 \begin_layout Description
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37509 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37510 source, additionally all images used in the document
37511 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37515 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37518 \begin_layout Description
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37527 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37528 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37529 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37537 \begin_layout Description
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37550 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37551 source that is compilable with the program
37557 \begin_layout Description
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37570 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37571 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37577 \begin_layout Description
37579 \begin_inset space ~
37582 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37583 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37589 \begin_inset space \space{}
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37613 represent the version number)
37616 \begin_layout Description
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37625 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37626 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37627 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37631 \begin_layout Description
37632 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37633 's internal XHTML engine
37636 \begin_layout Description
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37653 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37658 For the conversion the program
37667 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37670 \begin_layout Description
37671 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37676 \begin_layout Description
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37681 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37683 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37686 For the conversion the program
37695 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37698 \begin_layout Description
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37703 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37704 For the conversion the program
37713 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37716 \begin_layout Description
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37721 (cropped) the same as
37724 \begin_inset space ~
37729 but with cropped page margins
37732 \begin_layout Description
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37741 PDF-format using the program
37745 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37748 \begin_layout Description
37752 \begin_inset space ~
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37764 \begin_inset space ~
37769 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37774 \begin_inset space \space{}
37777 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37781 \begin_layout Description
37785 \begin_inset space ~
37790 PDF-format using the program
37792 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37795 , produces PDF-files directly
37798 \begin_layout Description
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37807 PDF-format using the program
37811 , produces PDF-files directly
37814 \begin_layout Description
37818 \begin_inset space ~
37823 PDF-format using the program
37827 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37830 \begin_layout Description
37834 \begin_inset space ~
37839 PDF-format using the program
37844 , produces PDF-files directly
37847 \begin_layout Description
37851 \begin_inset space ~
37859 \begin_layout Description
37863 \begin_inset space ~
37867 \begin_inset space ~
37872 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37873 and then exported as text using the program
37878 \begin_layout Description
37883 PostScript format using the program
37891 options see section
37892 \begin_inset space ~
37896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37898 reference "subsec:General-output"
37905 \begin_layout Description
37906 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37907 source and also code in the statistical programming
37921 it is possible to use
37925 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 If one of the menu entries
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37946 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37948 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37956 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37961 \begin_inset Index idx
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37965 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37974 \begin_layout Subsection
37978 \begin_layout Standard
37979 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37980 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37983 \begin_inset space ~
37987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37989 reference "sec:Paths"
37994 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38003 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38004 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38005 's preferences as described in section
38006 \begin_inset space ~
38010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38012 reference "subsec:Converters"
38019 \begin_layout Subsection
38020 New and Close Window
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38028 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 \begin_layout Standard
38033 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38036 \begin_layout Section
38038 \begin_inset Index idx
38041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38050 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 \begin_layout Standard
38055 Described in section
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38062 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38069 \begin_layout Subsection
38070 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 Described in section
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38081 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38088 \begin_layout Subsection
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38093 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38094 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38097 \begin_layout Subsection
38101 \begin_layout Standard
38102 Selects the whole document.
38105 \begin_layout Subsection
38106 Find & Replace (Quick)
38109 \begin_layout Standard
38110 Described in section
38111 \begin_inset space ~
38115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38117 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38124 \begin_layout Subsection
38125 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38129 Described in section
38130 \begin_inset space ~
38134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38136 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38143 \begin_layout Subsection
38144 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38147 \begin_layout Standard
38148 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38152 \begin_layout Subsection
38156 \begin_layout Standard
38157 Described in section
38158 \begin_inset space ~
38162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38164 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38171 \begin_layout Subsection
38173 \begin_inset Index idx
38176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38177 Paragraph ! Settings
38185 \begin_layout Standard
38186 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38187 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38191 \begin_layout Standard
38192 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38193 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38202 \begin_inset space ~
38210 \begin_layout Subsection
38211 Table and Rows & Columns
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38215 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38216 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38217 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38225 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38226 It will dissolve this inset.
38227 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38231 \begin_layout Subsection
38235 \begin_layout Standard
38236 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38237 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38240 \begin_layout Subsection
38241 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38244 \begin_layout Standard
38245 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38247 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38248 \begin_inset space ~
38252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38254 reference "sec:Nesting"
38259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38261 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38268 \begin_layout Subsection
38271 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38274 \begin_layout Standard
38275 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38276 nts of the same type.
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38284 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38288 for an explanation.
38291 \begin_layout Section
38293 \begin_inset Index idx
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38305 \begin_layout Standard
38306 At the bottom of the
38310 menu the opened documents are listed.
38313 \begin_layout Subsection
38314 Open/Close all Insets
38317 \begin_layout Standard
38318 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38321 \begin_layout Subsection
38322 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38325 \begin_layout Standard
38326 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38329 \begin_layout Standard
38330 Math macros are described in the
38337 \begin_layout Subsection
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38342 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38349 reference "sec:Navigating"
38354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38356 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38363 \begin_layout Subsection
38367 \begin_layout Standard
38368 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38376 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38383 \begin_layout Subsection
38387 \begin_layout Standard
38388 Opens a window showing console messages.
38389 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38394 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38395 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38396 is processing the document.
38399 \begin_layout Subsection
38401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38403 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38408 \begin_inset Index idx
38411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38420 \begin_layout Standard
38421 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38423 All toolbars and the
38426 \begin_inset space ~
38431 can be turned on and off.
38436 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38448 \begin_inset space ~
38460 \begin_inset space ~
38465 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38469 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38476 \begin_layout Standard
38481 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38485 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38486 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38487 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38488 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38489 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38492 \begin_layout Standard
38494 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38501 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38508 \begin_layout Subsection
38512 \begin_layout Standard
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38532 \begin_inset space ~
38536 \begin_inset space ~
38541 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38542 's main window vertically while
38545 \begin_inset space ~
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38565 \begin_inset space ~
38570 will split it horizontally.
38571 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38572 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38573 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38574 three or more documents at the same time.
38575 To close a split view, use the menu
38578 \begin_inset space ~
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38590 \begin_layout Subsection
38594 \begin_layout Standard
38595 Closes a split view.
38598 \begin_layout Subsection
38602 \begin_layout Standard
38603 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38604 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38605 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38606 's main window fullscreen.
38607 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38608 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38611 \begin_layout Section
38613 \begin_inset Index idx
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38625 \begin_layout Subsection
38629 \begin_layout Standard
38630 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38631 \begin_inset space ~
38635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38637 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38648 \begin_layout Subsection
38650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38652 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38659 \begin_layout Standard
38660 Here you can insert the following characters:
38663 \begin_layout Description
38668 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38671 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38672 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38673 -packages you have installed.
38674 You can get a complete display by checking
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38683 \begin_inset Newline newline
38687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Not all characters will be visible in the
38699 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38700 dialog (see section
38701 \begin_inset space ~
38705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38707 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38711 ) can display every character.
38719 \begin_layout Description
38720 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38724 \begin_layout Description
38726 \begin_inset space ~
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38733 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38740 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38747 \begin_layout Description
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38752 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38756 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38762 \begin_layout Description
38764 \begin_inset space ~
38767 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38771 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38777 \begin_layout Description
38779 \begin_inset space ~
38782 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38786 \begin_layout Description
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38791 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38795 \begin_layout Description
38797 \begin_inset space ~
38800 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38806 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38812 \begin_layout Description
38814 \begin_inset space ~
38817 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38821 \begin_layout Description
38823 \begin_inset space ~
38827 \begin_inset Index idx
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 \begin_inset Index idx
38840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38841 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38846 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38847 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38849 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38855 \begin_inset Index idx
38858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38866 \begin_inset Newline newline
38869 More information about this feature can be found in the
38875 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38881 \begin_layout Description
38882 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38884 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38885 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38889 \begin_layout Subsection
38893 \begin_layout Standard
38894 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38897 \begin_layout Description
38898 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38899 \begin_inset script superscript
38901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 \begin_layout Description
38911 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38912 \begin_inset script subscript
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 \begin_layout Description
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38928 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38935 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38942 \begin_layout Description
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38947 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38954 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38961 \begin_layout Description
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38966 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38967 \begin_inset space ~
38971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38973 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38980 \begin_layout Description
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38985 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38991 \begin_inset space \space{}
38994 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38995 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
39001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39004 To insert a fraction use the command
39009 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39013 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39022 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39029 \begin_layout Description
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39034 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39041 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39048 \begin_layout Description
39050 \begin_inset space ~
39053 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39054 \begin_inset space ~
39058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39060 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39067 \begin_layout Description
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39072 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39073 \begin_inset space ~
39077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39079 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39086 \begin_layout Description
39087 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39094 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39101 \begin_layout Description
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39106 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39113 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39120 \begin_layout Description
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39125 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39132 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39139 \begin_layout Description
39141 \begin_inset space ~
39145 \begin_inset space ~
39148 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
39151 \begin_inset space ~
39155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39157 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39164 for a usage example.
39167 \begin_layout Description
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39176 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39183 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39190 \begin_layout Description
39192 \begin_inset space ~
39195 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39196 as described in section
39197 \begin_inset space ~
39201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39203 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39210 \begin_layout Description
39212 \begin_inset space ~
39215 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39216 \begin_inset space ~
39220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39222 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39229 \begin_layout Description
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39234 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39235 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39237 \begin_inset space ~
39241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39243 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39250 \begin_layout Description
39252 \begin_inset space ~
39255 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39256 \begin_inset space ~
39260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39262 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39269 \begin_layout Description
39271 \begin_inset space ~
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39278 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39279 \begin_inset space ~
39283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39285 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39292 \begin_layout Subsection
39296 \begin_layout Standard
39297 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39322 are described in section
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39329 reference "sec:toc"
39338 is described in section
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39345 reference "sec:Index"
39353 is described in section
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39360 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39366 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39369 is described in section
39370 \begin_inset space ~
39374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39376 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39383 \begin_layout Subsection
39387 \begin_layout Standard
39388 To insert floats, as described in section
39389 \begin_inset space ~
39393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39395 reference "sec:Floats"
39399 and in detail the chapter
39406 \begin_inset space ~
39414 \begin_layout Subsection
39418 \begin_layout Standard
39419 To insert notes, described in section
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39426 reference "sec:Notes"
39433 \begin_layout Subsection
39437 \begin_layout Standard
39438 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39440 Branches are described in section
39441 \begin_inset space ~
39445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39447 reference "sec:Branches"
39454 \begin_layout Subsection
39458 \begin_layout Standard
39459 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39460 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39462 An example is the document class
39463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39470 with three custom insets.
39473 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39477 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39483 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39486 \begin_layout Subsection
39488 \begin_inset Index idx
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 \begin_layout Standard
39501 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39503 For more information see chapter
39505 External Document Parts
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39514 \begin_layout Subsection
39516 \begin_inset Index idx
39519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39528 \begin_layout Standard
39529 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39530 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_layout Subsection
39549 \begin_layout Standard
39554 dialog as described in section
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39561 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39568 \begin_layout Subsection
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39577 as described in section
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39584 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39591 \begin_layout Subsection
39595 \begin_layout Standard
39600 as described in section
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39607 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39614 \begin_layout Subsection
39616 \begin_inset Index idx
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39626 \begin_inset Index idx
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39630 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39638 \begin_layout Standard
39639 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39640 Floats are described in section
39641 \begin_inset space ~
39645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39647 reference "sec:Floats"
39651 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39653 Multi-page Captions
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_layout Subsection
39670 \begin_layout Standard
39671 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39678 reference "sec:Index"
39685 \begin_layout Subsection
39689 \begin_layout Standard
39690 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39697 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39704 \begin_layout Subsection
39708 \begin_layout Standard
39709 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39710 Tables are described in section
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39717 reference "sec:Tables"
39721 and in detail in the chapter
39728 \begin_inset space ~
39736 \begin_layout Subsection
39740 \begin_layout Standard
39746 Graphics are described in section
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39753 reference "sec:Graphics"
39760 \begin_layout Subsection
39764 \begin_layout Standard
39765 Inserts a URL as described in section
39766 \begin_inset space ~
39770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39772 reference "subsec:URLs"
39779 \begin_layout Subsection
39783 \begin_layout Standard
39784 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39785 \begin_inset space ~
39789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39791 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39798 \begin_layout Subsection
39802 \begin_layout Standard
39803 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39804 \begin_inset space ~
39808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39810 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39817 \begin_layout Subsection
39821 \begin_layout Standard
39822 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39823 \begin_inset space ~
39827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39829 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39836 \begin_layout Subsection
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39842 title or caption of a float.
39843 Inserts a short title as described in section
39844 \begin_inset space ~
39848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39850 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39857 \begin_layout Subsection
39862 \begin_layout Standard
39863 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39864 Code box as described in section
39865 \begin_inset space ~
39869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39871 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39878 \begin_layout Subsection
39880 \begin_inset Index idx
39883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 \begin_layout Standard
39893 Inserts a program listings box.
39894 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39896 Program Code Listings
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_layout Subsection
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39914 Inserts the actual date.
39915 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39920 \begin_layout Subsection
39924 \begin_layout Standard
39925 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39926 \begin_inset space ~
39930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39932 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39939 \begin_layout Section
39941 \begin_inset Index idx
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39953 \begin_layout Standard
39954 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39955 \begin_inset space ~
39958 of the current document.
39959 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39962 \begin_layout Subsection
39966 \begin_layout Standard
39967 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39968 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39969 to jump, for example, between section
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39974 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39978 2.5 and use the submenu
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40002 \begin_inset space ~
40008 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40012 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40018 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40021 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40024 \begin_layout Standard
40025 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40029 \begin_inset space ~
40034 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40042 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40045 \begin_layout Subsection
40046 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40049 \begin_layout Standard
40050 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40054 \begin_layout Subsection
40058 \begin_layout Standard
40059 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40060 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40061 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40077 \begin_layout Subsection
40081 \begin_layout Standard
40082 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40085 The \SpecialChar LyX
40086 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40101 manual for a detailed description.
40104 \begin_layout Section
40106 \begin_inset Index idx
40109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40118 \begin_layout Subsection
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40123 Change Tracking is described in section
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40130 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40137 \begin_layout Subsection
40145 \begin_layout Standard
40146 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40147 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40148 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40150 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40151 to the clipboard or update the view.
40152 \begin_inset Newline newline
40155 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40159 \begin_layout Standard
40162 Open Containing Directory
40164 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40165 's temporary folder for the document.
40166 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40167 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40168 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40169 For example some journals require to send the
40173 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40177 \begin_layout Subsection
40178 Start Appendix Here
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40182 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40183 as described in section
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "sec:Appendices"
40197 \begin_layout Subsection
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40205 \begin_layout Standard
40206 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40207 default output format for the document (menu
40209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40210 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40211 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40229 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40233 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40236 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40237 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40242 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40247 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40249 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40265 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40269 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40270 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40272 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40273 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40278 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40283 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40293 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40298 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40299 when it is first configured.
40300 The default output format is
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40311 \begin_layout Subsection
40312 View (Other Formats)
40315 \begin_layout Standard
40316 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40317 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40318 actual document with an external program.
40319 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40320 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40321 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40323 All possible formats are listed in section
40324 \begin_inset space ~
40328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40330 reference "subsec:Export"
40335 You should at least see the menu entry
40340 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40342 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40350 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40355 \begin_inset Index idx
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40359 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40368 \begin_layout Standard
40369 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40370 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40372 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40373 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40375 \begin_inset space ~
40378 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40383 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40387 \begin_inset space ~
40391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40393 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40398 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40399 when it is first configured.
40402 \begin_layout Subsection
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_layout Standard
40411 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40412 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40415 \begin_layout Subsection
40416 Update (Other Formats)
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40420 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40421 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40424 \begin_layout Subsection
40425 View Master Document
40428 \begin_layout Standard
40429 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40445 \begin_inset space ~
40450 manual for more information on this topic).
40451 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40452 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40465 generates the output of the whole book, while
40469 will just output the chapter alone.
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40473 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40474 in the document settings (menu
40476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40477 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40478 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40496 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40500 ) or in the preferences (menu
40502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40503 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40508 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40513 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40531 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40538 \begin_layout Subsection
40539 Update Master Document
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40559 \begin_inset space ~
40564 manual for more information on this topic).
40565 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40566 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40569 \begin_layout Standard
40570 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40571 in the document settings (menu
40573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40575 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40593 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40597 ) or in the preferences (menu
40599 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40600 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40605 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40607 \begin_inset space ~
40610 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset space ~
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40628 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40635 \begin_layout Subsection
40637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40639 name "subsec:Compressed"
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 Un/compresses the current document.
40648 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40649 compression (see the
40651 Additional Features
40653 manual for details).
40656 \begin_layout Subsection
40660 \begin_layout Standard
40661 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40664 \begin_layout Subsection
40668 \begin_layout Standard
40669 The document settings are described in appendix
40670 \begin_inset space ~
40674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40676 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40683 \begin_layout Section
40685 \begin_inset Index idx
40688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40697 \begin_layout Subsection
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 Spell checking is explained in section
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40709 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40716 \begin_layout Subsection
40720 \begin_layout Standard
40721 The thesaurus is described in section
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40728 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40735 \begin_layout Subsection
40737 \begin_inset Index idx
40740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40747 \begin_inset Index idx
40750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40759 \begin_layout Standard
40760 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40761 the highlighted document part.
40764 \begin_layout Subsection
40770 \begin_inset Index idx
40773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40774 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40783 \begin_layout Standard
40784 Generates with the help of the program
40786 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40789 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40790 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40791 This feature is not available on Windows.
40794 \begin_layout Subsection
40800 \begin_inset Index idx
40803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40813 \begin_layout Standard
40814 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40824 to see the full filename paths.
40827 \begin_layout Subsection
40829 \begin_inset Index idx
40832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40841 \begin_layout Standard
40842 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40843 files as described in section
40844 \begin_inset space ~
40848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40850 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40857 \begin_layout Subsection
40859 \begin_inset Index idx
40862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40875 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40893 \begin_inset Index idx
40896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40897 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40906 \begin_layout Standard
40907 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40908 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40909 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40910 -packages and programs it needs; see
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40918 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40925 \begin_layout Subsection
40929 \begin_layout Standard
40934 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40941 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40948 \begin_layout Section
40950 \begin_inset Index idx
40953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40962 \begin_layout Standard
40963 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40964 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40966 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40970 \begin_layout Standard
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40979 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40980 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40981 packages and classes found
40982 by \SpecialChar LyX
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40990 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40997 \begin_layout Standard
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41006 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
41011 \begin_layout Section
41013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41015 name "sec:Toolbars"
41022 \begin_layout Standard
41023 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41030 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41037 \begin_layout Standard
41038 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41039 This is described in the
41041 Additional Features
41046 \begin_layout Subsection
41048 \begin_inset Index idx
41051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 \begin_layout Standard
41061 \begin_inset Graphics
41062 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41070 \begin_layout Standard
41071 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41077 \begin_layout Standard
41078 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41095 \begin_inset Note Note
41098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41099 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41104 manual for more information.
41112 \begin_layout Standard
41113 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41119 \begin_layout Standard
41120 \begin_inset Tabular
41121 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41122 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41130 \begin_inset Graphics
41131 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41145 pull-down box for the environments
41158 \begin_layout Standard
41159 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41165 \begin_layout Standard
41167 \begin_inset Tabular
41168 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41169 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41170 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41171 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41195 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41225 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41255 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41301 arg "spelling-continuously"
41309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41313 Spellcheck continuously
41319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41342 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41372 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41402 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41478 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41518 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41574 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41575 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41603 Emphasize text, function of the
41605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41610 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41640 Set text to noun style, function of the
41642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41647 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41665 arg "textstyle-apply"
41673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41677 Format text using the current settings in the
41679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41681 \begin_inset space ~
41684 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41717 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41765 arg "tabular-insert"
41773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41795 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41807 Toggle outline window on/off,
41809 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41825 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41837 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41852 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41864 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41877 \begin_layout Subsection
41879 \begin_inset Index idx
41882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41891 \begin_layout Standard
41892 \begin_inset Graphics
41893 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41902 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41908 \begin_layout Standard
41909 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41913 \begin_layout Standard
41914 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41920 \begin_layout Standard
41921 \begin_inset Tabular
41922 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41923 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41924 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41925 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41962 arg "layout Enumerate"
41970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41989 arg "layout Itemize"
41997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42043 arg "layout Description"
42051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42070 arg "depth-increment"
42078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42108 arg "depth-decrement"
42116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 arg "float-insert figure"
42154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42161 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 arg "float-insert table"
42185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42192 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42238 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42314 \begin_inset space ~
42323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42332 arg "nomencl-insert"
42340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42366 arg "footnote-insert"
42374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42380 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42396 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42445 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42465 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42559 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42574 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42590 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42605 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42607 \begin_inset space ~
42616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42625 arg "dialog-show character"
42633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42639 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42641 \begin_inset space ~
42644 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42660 arg "layout-paragraph"
42668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42694 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42708 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42722 \begin_layout Subsection
42723 View/Update Toolbar
42724 \begin_inset Index idx
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42728 Toolbar ! View / Update
42736 \begin_layout Standard
42737 \begin_inset Graphics
42738 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42745 \begin_layout Standard
42746 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42752 \begin_layout Standard
42753 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42757 \begin_layout Standard
42758 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42764 \begin_layout Standard
42765 \begin_inset Tabular
42766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42767 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42768 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42809 arg "buffer-update"
42817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42839 arg "master-buffer-view"
42847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42855 \begin_inset space ~
42864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42873 arg "master-buffer-update"
42881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42889 \begin_inset space ~
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42911 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42926 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42927 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42928 Synchronize with Output
42934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42958 View (Other Formats)
42964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42971 arg "update-others"
42979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42986 Update (Other Formats)
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43004 \begin_layout Subsection
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43016 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43020 , the table toolbar
43021 \begin_inset Index idx
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43033 \begin_inset space ~
43038 manual and the math macro toolbar
43039 \begin_inset Index idx
43042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43055 \begin_layout Chapter
43056 The Document Settings
43057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43059 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43064 \begin_inset Index idx
43067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43068 Document ! Settings
43076 \begin_layout Standard
43080 \begin_inset space ~
43085 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43086 is called with the menu
43088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43092 You can save your document settings as default with the
43094 Save as Document Defaults
43096 button in any dialog.
43097 This will create a template named
43101 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43102 when you create a new document without
43106 \begin_layout Standard
43111 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43112 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43117 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43118 to find the one you are looking for.
43119 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43120 the submenus of the dialog.
43122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43126 \begin_inset space \space{}
43130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43137 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43138 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43139 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43142 \begin_layout Section
43146 \begin_layout Standard
43147 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43149 Document classes are described in section
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43156 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43164 \begin_layout Standard
43168 \begin_inset space ~
43173 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43178 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43179 as a layout for a document class.
43180 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43182 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 Some classes use special class options by default.
43193 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43197 and you can decide to use them or not.
43198 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43199 recommended you leave them untouched.
43204 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43205 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43210 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43212 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43218 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43219 \begin_inset Newline newline
43224 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43227 \begin_inset Newline newline
43230 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43231 distribution, see section
43236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43238 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43256 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43257 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43258 in the background if the child document
43259 is opened without its master.
43260 This way child documents are always compilable.
43261 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43268 \begin_inset space ~
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43277 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43288 \begin_inset Index idx
43291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43293 packages ! prettyref
43299 \begin_inset Index idx
43302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 packages ! refstyle
43309 for cross-references, see section
43310 \begin_inset space ~
43314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43316 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43323 \begin_layout Section
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43329 Please refer to the section
43332 \begin_inset space ~
43340 \begin_inset space ~
43345 manual for details.
43348 \begin_layout Section
43352 \begin_layout Standard
43353 Modules are explained in section
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43360 reference "subsec:Modules"
43367 \begin_layout Section
43371 \begin_layout Standard
43373 \begin_inset space ~
43377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43379 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43386 \begin_layout Section
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43391 The document font settings are described in section
43392 \begin_inset space ~
43396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43398 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43405 \begin_layout Section
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43410 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43427 and whether it should be a
43430 \begin_inset space ~
43435 can also be specified here.
43438 \begin_layout Standard
43439 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43440 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43441 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43443 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43446 \begin_layout Standard
43449 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43452 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43453 justifies the text on screen.
43454 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43458 \begin_layout Section
43462 \begin_layout Standard
43463 This dialog is described in sections
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43470 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43477 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43484 \begin_layout Section
43488 \begin_layout Standard
43489 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43490 \begin_inset space ~
43494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43496 reference "subsec:Margins"
43503 \begin_layout Section
43505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43507 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43512 \begin_inset Index idx
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43516 Language ! Encoding
43524 \begin_layout Standard
43525 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43526 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43527 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43529 is always encoded in utf8).
43530 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43531 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43532 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43533 -command is not known for
43534 a particular character).
43537 \begin_layout Standard
43538 If you use the option
43543 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43544 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43545 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43547 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43548 exactly one encoding.
43549 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43552 \begin_layout Standard
43554 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43555 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43556 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43557 installation supports Unicode), choose
43558 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43559 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43560 is quite incomplete, so
43561 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43566 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43567 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43568 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43569 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43570 -commands is not used, because all
43571 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43572 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43573 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43574 , two new alternative engines
43575 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43577 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43579 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43610 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43615 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43619 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43631 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43632 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43642 The possible settings are:
43645 \begin_layout Description
43646 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43648 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43649 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43659 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43666 \begin_layout Description
43667 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43668 format you will use.
43669 In many cases this will be
43674 \begin_inset Index idx
43677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43685 If the newer package
43690 \begin_inset Index idx
43693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43695 packages ! polyglossia
43700 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43701 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43702 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43704 this package will be used instead of
43711 \begin_layout Description
43713 \begin_inset space ~
43724 would be more appropriate.
43727 \begin_layout Description
43728 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43729 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43733 (for German texts), type in
43736 \begin_inset Newline newline
43741 usepackage{ngerman}
43744 \begin_layout Description
43745 None will not use a language package.
43746 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43749 \begin_layout Standard
43750 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43753 \begin_layout Description
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43770 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43776 \begin_inset Index idx
43779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43781 packages ! inputenc
43787 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43788 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43789 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43793 \begin_layout Description
43794 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43796 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43797 commands, which may result in a big
43798 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43799 -commands are needed.
43802 \begin_layout Description
43804 \begin_inset space ~
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43811 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43814 \begin_layout Description
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43820 \begin_inset space ~
43823 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43826 \begin_layout Description
43828 \begin_inset space ~
43831 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43834 \begin_layout Description
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43843 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43844 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43847 \begin_layout Description
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43856 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43860 \begin_layout Description
43862 \begin_inset space ~
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43869 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43870 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43873 \begin_layout Description
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43886 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43887 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_layout Description
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43899 \begin_inset space ~
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43906 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43907 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43910 \begin_layout Description
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43916 \begin_inset space ~
43919 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43920 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43921 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43922 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43933 \begin_layout Description
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43942 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43943 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43944 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43946 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43957 \begin_layout Description
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43963 \begin_inset space ~
43966 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43969 \begin_layout Description
43971 \begin_inset space ~
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43978 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43981 \begin_layout Description
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43990 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43993 \begin_layout Description
43995 \begin_inset space ~
43998 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
44001 \begin_layout Description
44003 \begin_inset space ~
44006 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44009 \begin_layout Description
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44018 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44021 \begin_layout Description
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44033 \begin_layout Description
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44042 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44045 \begin_layout Description
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44057 \begin_layout Description
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44063 \begin_inset space ~
44066 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44072 \begin_inset Index idx
44075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44082 , when using this, set the document language to
44087 \begin_layout Description
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44096 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44101 , when using this, set the document language to
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_layout Description
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_inset space ~
44119 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44125 \begin_inset Index idx
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44130 packages ! japanese
44135 , when using this, set the document language to
44140 \begin_layout Description
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44149 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44154 , when using this, set the document language to
44159 \begin_layout Description
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44168 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44173 , when using this, set the document language to
44178 \begin_layout Description
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44183 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44186 \begin_layout Description
44188 \begin_inset space ~
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44196 \begin_inset space ~
44199 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44202 \begin_layout Description
44204 \begin_inset space ~
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44215 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44216 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44217 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44220 \begin_layout Description
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44232 \begin_layout Description
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44238 \begin_inset space ~
44241 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44242 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44245 \begin_layout Description
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44254 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44260 \begin_inset Index idx
44263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44270 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44273 \begin_layout Description
44275 \begin_inset space ~
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44286 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44293 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44296 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44303 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44304 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44306 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44309 \begin_layout Description
44311 \begin_inset space ~
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44318 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44324 \begin_inset Index idx
44327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44334 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44337 \begin_layout Description
44339 \begin_inset space ~
44342 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44348 \begin_inset Index idx
44351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44353 packages ! inputenc
44359 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44363 \begin_layout Description
44365 \begin_inset space ~
44369 \begin_inset space ~
44373 \begin_inset space ~
44376 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44383 \begin_layout Description
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44396 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44397 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44398 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44402 \begin_layout Description
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44415 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44416 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44419 \begin_layout Section
44421 \begin_inset Index idx
44424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44431 \begin_inset Index idx
44434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 \begin_inset Index idx
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44445 Color ! Shaded boxes
44451 \begin_inset Index idx
44454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44455 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44463 \begin_layout Standard
44464 Here you can alter the font color for the
44468 (default: black), for
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44476 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44480 (default: white) and for
44483 \begin_inset space ~
44493 sets the color back to the default.
44496 \begin_layout Standard
44497 Clicking any button showing
44505 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44506 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44507 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44508 later more quickly.
44511 \begin_layout Standard
44512 Note, if you change the
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44520 font color and use the option
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44528 in the document settings under
44531 \begin_inset space ~
44536 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44537 \begin_inset space ~
44541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44543 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44550 \begin_layout Standard
44551 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44557 \begin_layout Standard
44561 \begin_inset space ~
44570 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44573 \begin_inset space ~
44576 Code after a forced page break:
44579 \begin_layout Itemize
44580 For the page color:
44581 \begin_inset Newline newline
44588 pagecolor{color name}
44591 \begin_layout Itemize
44592 For the text color:
44593 \begin_inset Newline newline
44603 \begin_layout Standard
44604 You are restricted to one of
44640 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44647 \begin_inset space ~
44653 \begin_inset Newline newline
44656 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44657 names to refer to them:
44660 \begin_layout Itemize
44666 \begin_inset Newline newline
44671 page_backgroundcolor
44674 \begin_layout Itemize
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44684 \begin_inset Newline newline
44692 \begin_layout Itemize
44696 \begin_inset space ~
44702 \begin_inset Newline newline
44710 \begin_layout Itemize
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44720 \begin_inset Newline newline
44728 \begin_layout Standard
44729 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44748 \begin_layout Section
44752 \begin_layout Standard
44753 Here you can adjust the
44757 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44761 as described in section
44762 \begin_inset space ~
44766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44768 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44775 \begin_layout Section
44779 \begin_layout Standard
44780 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44786 \begin_inset Index idx
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44791 packages ! biblatex
44801 \begin_inset Index idx
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 \begin_inset Index idx
44819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44827 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44830 Sectioned bibliography
44832 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44838 \begin_inset Index idx
44841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 packages ! bibtopic
44853 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44854 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44858 for the generation of the bibliography.
44859 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44866 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44873 \begin_layout Section
44877 \begin_layout Standard
44878 Here you can define the
44882 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44890 reference "sec:Index"
44897 \begin_layout Section
44901 \begin_layout Standard
44902 The PDF properties are explained in section
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44909 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44916 \begin_layout Section
44920 \begin_layout Standard
44921 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44922 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44928 \begin_inset Index idx
44931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44943 \begin_inset Index idx
44946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44958 \begin_inset Index idx
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44973 \begin_inset Index idx
44976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44988 \begin_inset Index idx
44991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44993 packages ! mathdots
45003 \begin_inset Index idx
45006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45008 packages ! mathtools
45018 \begin_inset Index idx
45021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45033 \begin_inset Index idx
45036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45038 packages ! stackrel
45048 \begin_inset Index idx
45051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45053 packages ! stmaryrd
45063 \begin_inset Index idx
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45068 packages ! undertilde
45073 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45076 \begin_layout Description
45077 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45078 -errors in formulas,
45079 ensure that you have this enabled.
45082 \begin_layout Description
45083 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45084 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45085 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45089 \begin_layout Description
45090 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45093 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_layout Description
45106 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45121 \begin_layout Description
45122 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45133 \begin_layout Description
45134 mathtools is used for the math commands
45170 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45177 \begin_layout Description
45178 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45180 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45189 \begin_layout Description
45190 stackrel is used for the math command
45207 \begin_layout Description
45208 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45211 \begin_layout Description
45212 undertilde is used for the math command
45220 Accents for one Character
45229 \begin_layout Section
45233 \begin_layout Standard
45234 The float placement options are described in the section
45237 \begin_inset space ~
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45253 \begin_layout Section
45257 \begin_layout Standard
45258 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45260 Program Code Listings
45265 \begin_inset space ~
45273 \begin_layout Section
45277 \begin_layout Standard
45278 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45286 set to be used and set the
45291 The itemize environment is described in section
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45298 reference "sec:Itemize"
45305 \begin_layout Standard
45306 You can furthermore specify a
45309 \begin_inset space ~
45314 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45315 command of the desired character.
45316 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45323 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45329 \begin_inset space \space{}
45333 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45343 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45344 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45347 \begin_layout Standard
45348 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45356 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45357 -packages in the preamble (menu
45360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45361 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45370 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45374 usepackage{textcomp}
45377 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45381 usepackage{amssymb}
45391 \begin_layout Section
45395 \begin_layout Standard
45396 Branches are described in section
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45403 reference "sec:Branches"
45410 \begin_layout Section
45412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45414 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45421 \begin_layout Standard
45422 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45425 \begin_layout Description
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45431 \begin_inset space ~
45434 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45454 View Master Document
45455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45462 Update Master Document
45463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45470 menu or the toolbar.
45471 The default is set in
45473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45474 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45476 \begin_inset space ~
45479 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45483 \begin_inset space ~
45487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45489 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45496 \begin_layout Description
45498 \begin_inset space ~
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45505 Output settings for the menu
45507 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45509 \begin_inset space ~
45515 For a detailed description see section
45517 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45530 \begin_layout Description
45532 \begin_inset space ~
45536 \begin_inset space ~
45539 Options offers settings for the export format
45547 \begin_inset space ~
45552 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45553 \begin_inset space ~
45556 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45560 \begin_inset space ~
45565 settings are described in detail in section
45567 Math Output in XHTML
45572 \begin_inset space ~
45581 \begin_inset space ~
45585 \begin_inset space ~
45590 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45593 \begin_layout Description
45595 \begin_inset space ~
45600 Save transient properties
45602 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45603 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45604 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45608 \begin_layout Itemize
45609 the activation of change tracking
45612 \begin_layout Itemize
45613 the output of tracked changes
45616 \begin_layout Itemize
45617 the recording of the document directory path.
45620 \begin_layout Standard
45621 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45622 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45626 \begin_layout Section
45634 \begin_layout Standard
45635 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45637 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45639 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45641 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45645 \begin_layout Standard
45646 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45647 -syntax is given in section
45648 \begin_inset space ~
45652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45654 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45661 \begin_layout Chapter
45667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45669 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45674 \begin_inset Index idx
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45686 \begin_layout Standard
45687 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45689 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45693 It has the following submenus.
45696 \begin_layout Section
45700 \begin_layout Subsection
45704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45705 User Interface File
45706 \begin_inset Index idx
45709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45710 Customization ! of toolbars
45716 \begin_inset Index idx
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 Customization ! of menus
45728 \begin_layout Standard
45729 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45730 interface (ui) file.
45731 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45739 \begin_layout Description
45744 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45747 \begin_layout Description
45754 the menu entries in popup context menus
45757 \begin_layout Description
45762 specifies the toolbar buttons
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45766 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45767 and edit the entries.
45770 \begin_layout Standard
45771 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45783 entries must be finished with an explicit
45808 and in the case of the
45809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45821 The syntax for the entries is:
45824 \begin_layout Standard
45825 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45854 \begin_layout Standard
45856 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45859 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45860 -functions are listed in the menu
45862 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45872 \begin_layout Standard
45873 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45879 \begin_layout Standard
45880 For example, assuming you use the menu
45882 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45885 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45889 \begin_layout Standard
45890 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45914 \begin_layout Standard
45916 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45931 to have the sixth bookmark.
45934 \begin_layout Standard
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45943 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45944 's toolbar buttons.
45945 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45946 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45949 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45964 Enable tool tips in main work area
45966 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45974 \begin_layout Standard
45979 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45980 should display in the menu
45982 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45984 \begin_inset space ~
45992 \begin_layout Subsection
45996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46000 \begin_layout Standard
46003 Restore window layouts and geometries
46006 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46007 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46011 \begin_layout Standard
46014 Restore cursor positions
46016 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46020 \begin_layout Standard
46023 Load opened files from last session
46025 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46029 \begin_layout Standard
46032 Clear all session information
46034 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46035 sessions (cursor positions, names
46036 of last opened documents, etc.).
46039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46043 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46048 \begin_inset Index idx
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 \begin_layout Standard
46063 Backup original documents when saving
46065 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46066 it was saved the last time.
46067 It is stored in the
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_inset space ~
46080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46082 reference "sec:Paths"
46086 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46095 The backup file has the file extension
46096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46110 \begin_layout Standard
46113 Backup documents, every
46115 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46118 \begin_layout Standard
46121 Save documents compressed by default
46123 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46124 \begin_inset space ~
46128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46130 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46135 This applies to newly created documents only.
46136 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46140 Windows & work area
46143 \begin_layout Standard
46146 Open documents in tabs
46148 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46152 \begin_layout Standard
46157 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 \begin_inset space ~
46168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46170 reference "sec:Paths"
46174 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46181 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46182 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46183 of \SpecialChar LyX
46185 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46186 instance is created for each file.
46189 \begin_layout Standard
46192 Single close-tab button
46194 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46204 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46205 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46206 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46210 \begin_layout Standard
46211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46220 before the change takes effect.
46228 \begin_layout Standard
46233 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46235 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46237 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46241 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46242 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46243 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46246 \begin_layout Subsection
46248 \begin_inset Index idx
46251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46260 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46267 \begin_layout Standard
46268 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46272 \begin_layout Standard
46273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46281 This section only deals with the fonts
46285 the \SpecialChar LyX
46287 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46291 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46302 \begin_layout Standard
46303 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46320 (depends on the system) as its
46323 \begin_inset space ~
46339 \begin_layout Standard
46340 You can change the font size with the
46347 \begin_layout Standard
46352 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46357 points have the size of 1
46358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46368 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46373 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46378 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46385 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46392 \begin_layout Standard
46395 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46397 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46398 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46399 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46400 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46401 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46403 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46404 \begin_inset space ~
46410 \begin_layout Subsection
46412 \begin_inset Index idx
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46423 \begin_inset Index idx
46426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 \begin_layout Standard
46436 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46437 by choosing an item in the
46438 list and selecting the
46445 \begin_layout Standard
46446 By checking the option
46450 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46453 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46463 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46466 \begin_layout Subsection
46468 \begin_inset Index idx
46471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 \begin_layout Standard
46481 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46485 \begin_layout Standard
46490 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46491 This feature is described in section
46492 \begin_inset space ~
46496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46498 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46505 \begin_layout Standard
46506 Checking the option
46509 \begin_inset space ~
46513 \begin_inset space ~
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46522 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46525 \begin_layout Section
46527 \begin_inset Index idx
46530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46539 \begin_layout Subsection
46543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46547 \begin_layout Standard
46550 Cursor follows scrollbar
46552 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46556 \begin_layout Standard
46557 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46558 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46559 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46562 \begin_layout Standard
46565 Scroll below end of document
46567 is self-explanatory.
46570 \begin_layout Standard
46571 In \SpecialChar LyX
46572 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46579 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46581 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46582 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46585 \begin_layout Standard
46588 Sort environments alphabetically
46590 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46593 \begin_layout Standard
46596 Group environments by their category
46598 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46601 \begin_layout Standard
46606 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46621 \begin_layout Standard
46622 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46627 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46628 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46632 \begin_layout Subsection
46634 \begin_inset Index idx
46637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46644 \begin_inset Index idx
46647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46648 Settings ! Shortcuts
46656 \begin_layout Standard
46661 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46663 Several binding files are available, among them:
46666 \begin_layout Description
46667 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46670 \begin_layout Description
46671 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46683 \begin_layout Description
46684 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46695 \begin_layout Standard
46696 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46701 , and binding files for special languages.
46702 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46707 \begin_inset space \space{}
46711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46719 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46720 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46721 will try to use the appropriate binding
46725 \begin_layout Standard
46726 Some binding files, like
46730 , only have a limited scope.
46731 When looking at the end of the file
46735 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46738 \begin_layout Standard
46742 \begin_inset space ~
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46751 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46752 in the selected key binding file.
46755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46759 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46764 \begin_inset Index idx
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46768 Key Bindings ! Editing
46776 \begin_layout Standard
46777 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46778 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46779 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46780 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46783 Show key-bindings containing
46786 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46787 Insert there for example as keyword
46788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46795 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46796 functions that contain
46797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46805 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46806 All \SpecialChar LyX
46807 functions are also listed in the file
46812 that you will find in the
46819 \begin_layout Standard
46820 For example, to add the shortcut
46828 , select the function and press the
46833 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46834 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46838 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46839 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46841 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46842 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46844 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46850 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46853 \begin_layout Standard
46854 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46856 The syntax of the entries is:
46859 \begin_layout Standard
46865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46884 \begin_layout Standard
46885 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46886 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46914 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46915 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46916 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46917 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46919 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46923 , you needed to specify it as
46928 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46931 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46934 \begin_layout Subsection
46936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46938 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46943 \begin_inset Index idx
46946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46953 \begin_inset Index idx
46956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46957 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46965 \begin_layout Standard
46966 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46967 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46968 provides keyboard maps.
46969 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46970 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46973 \begin_inset space ~
46977 \begin_inset space ~
46982 and select the keyboard map file named
46989 \begin_layout Standard
46998 keyboard map and, if you use the
47002 bindings, you can select the first and second with
47005 arg "keymap-primary"
47011 arg "keymap-secondary"
47014 respectively or toggle between them with
47017 arg "keymap-toggle"
47023 \begin_layout Standard
47024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47032 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47041 \begin_layout Standard
47042 You can also specify the mouse
47044 Wheel scrolling speed
47047 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47051 Middle mouse button pasting
47053 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47054 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47057 \begin_layout Standard
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47069 \begin_inset space ~
47074 you can select a key for zooming.
47075 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47078 \begin_layout Subsection
47082 \begin_layout Standard
47083 Input completion is described in section
47084 \begin_inset space ~
47088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47090 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47097 \begin_layout Section
47099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47106 \begin_inset Index idx
47109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47116 \begin_inset Index idx
47119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47128 \begin_layout Standard
47129 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47130 are normally determined during
47132 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47135 \begin_layout Description
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47140 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47141 's working directory.
47142 It is the default when you
47153 \begin_inset space ~
47161 \begin_layout Description
47163 \begin_inset space ~
47166 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47168 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47182 \begin_layout Description
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47187 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47193 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47197 \begin_inset Newline newline
47201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47213 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47214 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47222 \begin_layout Description
47224 \begin_inset space ~
47228 \begin_inset Index idx
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47237 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47238 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47239 \begin_inset space ~
47243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47245 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47253 will be used to save the backups.
47254 \begin_inset Newline newline
47257 Backup files have the ending
47258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47268 \begin_layout Description
47270 \begin_inset space ~
47273 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47274 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47276 \begin_inset Newline newline
47283 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47289 You can edit this file with the program
47298 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47299 in its preferences under
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47308 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47313 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47315 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47316 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47322 and \SpecialChar LyX
47323 need to be running the same time.
47324 \begin_inset Newline newline
47327 The pipe is also used for the
47331 feature, see section
47332 \begin_inset space ~
47336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47338 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47343 \begin_inset Newline newline
47346 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47347 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47348 \begin_inset Newline newline
47364 \begin_layout Description
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47369 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47372 \begin_layout Description
47374 \begin_inset space ~
47377 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47378 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47379 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47382 \begin_layout Description
47384 \begin_inset space ~
47387 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47393 You only need to specify it if you are using
47397 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47399 For \SpecialChar LyX
47404 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47408 \begin_layout Description
47410 \begin_inset space ~
47413 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47414 When \SpecialChar LyX
47415 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47416 to find it on the system.
47417 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47419 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47428 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47429 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47432 \begin_layout Description
47434 \begin_inset space ~
47437 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47438 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47439 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47440 code or in the document
47442 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47444 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47445 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47446 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47447 scanned for the input files.
47448 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47449 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47451 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47452 compilation may fail for some documents.
47455 \begin_layout Section
47459 \begin_layout Standard
47460 Here you can insert your
47469 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47477 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47481 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47484 \begin_layout Section
47486 \begin_inset Index idx
47489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47490 Language ! Settings
47496 \begin_inset Index idx
47499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47500 Settings ! Language
47508 \begin_layout Subsection
47510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47512 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47519 \begin_layout Description
47521 \begin_inset space ~
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47528 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47530 You can find its actual translation status here:
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47533 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47541 \begin_layout Description
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47546 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47547 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47548 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47549 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47566 The most widespread language package is
47571 \begin_inset Index idx
47574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47581 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47583 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47584 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47585 come with the alternative
47591 \begin_inset Index idx
47594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47596 packages ! polyglossia
47601 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47602 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47608 The available selections are described in section
47609 \begin_inset space ~
47613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47615 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47622 \begin_layout Description
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47627 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47628 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47629 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47630 An example is the start command
47636 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47638 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47642 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47658 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47663 \begin_layout Description
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47673 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47674 command toggles the package on and off.
47677 \begin_layout Description
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47690 \begin_layout Description
47692 \begin_inset space ~
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47699 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47703 \begin_layout Description
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47709 \begin_inset space ~
47712 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47713 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47714 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47716 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47723 \begin_layout Description
47725 \begin_inset space ~
47728 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47730 When this option is not set, the
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47738 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47740 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47743 \begin_inset space ~
47751 \begin_layout Description
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47759 \begin_inset space ~
47765 When it is not set, the
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47773 is set to the end of the document.
47776 \begin_layout Description
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47782 \begin_inset space ~
47785 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47786 language will be underlined in blue.
47789 \begin_layout Description
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47798 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47799 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47802 \begin_layout Description
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47807 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47808 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47809 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47810 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47813 \begin_layout Subsection
47817 \begin_layout Standard
47818 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47819 \begin_inset space ~
47823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47825 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47832 \begin_layout Section
47836 \begin_layout Subsection
47838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47840 name "subsec:General-output"
47847 \begin_layout Description
47849 \begin_inset space ~
47852 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47854 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47856 \begin_inset space ~
47862 For a detailed description see section
47864 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47869 \begin_inset space ~
47877 \begin_layout Description
47879 \begin_inset space ~
47882 Options Options for the program
47886 that is used for the export format
47891 \begin_inset space ~
47895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47897 reference "subsec:Export"
47902 Possible options are listed in the
47907 \begin_inset Newline newline
47911 \begin_inset Flex URL
47914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47916 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47926 \begin_layout Description
47928 \begin_inset space ~
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47935 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47938 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47939 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47941 \begin_inset space ~
47947 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47950 \begin_layout Description
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47956 \begin_inset Index idx
47959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47966 \begin_inset Index idx
47969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47970 Settings ! Date format
47975 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47976 \begin_inset Newline newline
47980 \begin_inset Flex URL
47983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47985 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47991 \begin_inset Newline newline
47994 For example the format
47995 \begin_inset Newline newline
47999 \begin_inset Newline newline
48002 prints the date as day/month/year.
48005 \begin_layout Description
48007 \begin_inset space ~
48011 \begin_inset space ~
48014 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
48015 is allowed to overwrite on export.
48018 \begin_layout Subsection
48024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48026 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
48031 \begin_inset Index idx
48034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48035 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48044 \begin_layout Description
48046 \begin_inset space ~
48054 \begin_inset space ~
48058 \begin_inset space ~
48061 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48066 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48087 are used for Cyrillic.
48088 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48101 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48103 sets up in the background.
48104 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48107 \begin_layout Description
48109 \begin_inset space ~
48113 \begin_inset space ~
48117 \begin_inset space ~
48121 \begin_inset space ~
48124 options They only have an effect when the program
48128 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48131 \begin_layout Standard
48132 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48133 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48134 manuals of the applications.
48137 \begin_layout Description
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48142 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48143 \begin_inset space ~
48147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48149 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48156 \begin_layout Description
48158 \begin_inset space ~
48161 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48162 \begin_inset space ~
48166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48168 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48175 \begin_layout Description
48177 \begin_inset space ~
48180 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48181 \begin_inset space ~
48185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48187 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48194 \begin_layout Description
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48203 command Command for the program
48205 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48208 that is described in the section
48210 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48215 Additional Features
48220 \begin_layout Standard
48221 There are additionally the following options:
48224 \begin_layout Description
48226 \begin_inset space ~
48230 \begin_inset space ~
48234 \begin_inset space ~
48238 \begin_inset space ~
48243 \begin_inset space ~
48246 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48264 to separate folders.
48265 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48267 \begin_inset Index idx
48270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48277 \begin_inset Index idx
48280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 \begin_layout Description
48291 \begin_inset space ~
48295 \begin_inset space ~
48299 \begin_inset space ~
48303 \begin_inset space ~
48307 \begin_inset space ~
48311 \begin_inset space ~
48314 changes Removes all manually set
48320 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48321 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48323 \begin_inset space ~
48328 dialog when changing the document class.
48331 \begin_layout Section
48333 \begin_inset space ~
48337 \begin_inset Index idx
48340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48349 \begin_layout Subsection
48351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48353 name "subsec:Converters"
48358 \begin_inset Index idx
48361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48370 \begin_layout Standard
48371 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48372 from one format to another.
48373 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48374 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48381 \begin_inset space ~
48386 field and press the
48391 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48395 \begin_inset space ~
48400 drop-down list, modify the
48404 field and press the
48411 \begin_layout Standard
48414 Converter File Cache
48420 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48422 Maximum Age (in days
48425 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48426 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48429 \begin_layout Standard
48430 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48431 definition, is described in the section
48442 \begin_layout Subsection
48444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48446 name "sec:File-Formats"
48451 \begin_inset Index idx
48454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48461 \begin_inset Index idx
48464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48473 \begin_layout Standard
48474 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48484 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48487 \begin_layout Standard
48488 You can also define the
48490 Default output format
48492 that is used when you use
48494 View, Update, View Master Document
48498 Update Master Document
48504 menu or the toolbar.
48507 \begin_layout Standard
48508 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48519 \begin_layout Standard
48520 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48522 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48523 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48524 This is done by specifying a
48529 More about this is described in the section
48540 \begin_layout Chapter
48541 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48543 \begin_inset Index idx
48546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48555 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48562 \begin_layout Standard
48564 \begin_inset space ~
48568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48570 reference "tab:Units"
48574 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48575 and used in this documentation.
48578 \begin_layout Standard
48579 \begin_inset Float table
48585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48586 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48604 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48612 \begin_inset Tabular
48613 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48614 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48616 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48617 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48770 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49041 scaled point (65536
49042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49109 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
49114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49233 % of original image width
49238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49322 \begin_layout Standard
49323 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49326 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49333 \begin_layout Bibliography
49334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49335 LatexCommand bibitem
49342 The \SpecialChar LyX
49344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49347 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49353 \begin_inset Newline newline
49357 \begin_inset Flex URL
49360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49362 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49370 \begin_layout Bibliography
49371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49372 LatexCommand bibitem
49373 key "latexcompanion"
49378 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49380 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49381 Companion Second Edition.
49384 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49387 \begin_layout Bibliography
49388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49389 LatexCommand bibitem
49395 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49398 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49402 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49405 \begin_layout Bibliography
49406 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49407 LatexCommand bibitem
49416 : A Document Preparation System.
49419 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49422 \begin_layout Bibliography
49423 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49424 LatexCommand bibitem
49434 The \SpecialChar TeX
49438 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49441 \begin_layout Bibliography
49442 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49443 LatexCommand bibitem
49449 The \SpecialChar TeX
49451 \begin_inset Newline newline
49455 \begin_inset Flex URL
49458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49460 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49468 \begin_layout Bibliography
49469 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49470 LatexCommand bibitem
49476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49478 \begin_inset Newline newline
49482 \begin_inset Flex URL
49485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49487 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49495 \begin_layout Bibliography
49496 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49497 LatexCommand bibitem
49504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49506 name "Documentation"
49507 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49514 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49518 \begin_inset Newline newline
49522 \begin_inset Flex URL
49525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49527 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49535 \begin_layout Bibliography
49536 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49537 LatexCommand bibitem
49544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49546 name "Documentation"
49547 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49552 how to use the program
49554 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49558 \begin_inset Newline newline
49562 \begin_inset Flex URL
49565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49567 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49575 \begin_layout Bibliography
49576 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49577 LatexCommand bibitem
49584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49586 name "Documentation"
49587 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49592 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49598 \begin_inset Index idx
49601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49603 packages ! biblatex
49609 \begin_inset Newline newline
49613 \begin_inset Flex URL
49616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49618 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49626 \begin_layout Bibliography
49627 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49628 LatexCommand bibitem
49635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49637 name "Documentation"
49638 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49643 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49649 \begin_inset Index idx
49652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49660 \begin_inset Newline newline
49664 \begin_inset Flex URL
49667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49669 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49677 \begin_layout Bibliography
49678 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49679 LatexCommand bibitem
49686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49688 name "Documentation"
49689 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49699 \begin_inset Newline newline
49703 \begin_inset Flex URL
49706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49708 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49716 \begin_layout Bibliography
49717 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49718 LatexCommand bibitem
49719 key "makeindex-man"
49725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49728 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49738 \begin_inset Newline newline
49742 \begin_inset Flex URL
49745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49747 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49755 \begin_layout Bibliography
49756 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49757 LatexCommand bibitem
49764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49766 name "Documentation"
49767 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49777 \begin_inset Newline newline
49781 \begin_inset Flex URL
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49794 \begin_layout Bibliography
49795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49796 LatexCommand bibitem
49803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49805 name "Documentation"
49806 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49811 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49813 \begin_inset Newline newline
49817 \begin_inset Flex URL
49820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49822 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49830 \begin_layout Bibliography
49831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49832 LatexCommand bibitem
49839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49841 name "Documentation"
49842 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49847 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49853 \begin_inset Index idx
49856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49864 \begin_inset Newline newline
49868 \begin_inset Flex URL
49871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49873 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49881 \begin_layout Bibliography
49882 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49883 LatexCommand bibitem
49890 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49892 name "Documentation"
49893 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49898 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49904 \begin_inset Index idx
49907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49909 packages ! enumitem
49915 \begin_inset Newline newline
49919 \begin_inset Flex URL
49922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49924 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49932 \begin_layout Bibliography
49933 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49934 LatexCommand bibitem
49941 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49943 name "Documentation"
49944 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49949 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49955 \begin_inset Index idx
49958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49960 packages ! fancyhdr
49966 \begin_inset Newline newline
49970 \begin_inset Flex URL
49973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49975 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49983 \begin_layout Bibliography
49984 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49985 LatexCommand bibitem
49992 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49994 name "Documentation"
49995 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
50000 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50006 \begin_inset Index idx
50009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50011 packages ! hyperref
50017 \begin_inset Newline newline
50021 \begin_inset Flex URL
50024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50026 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
50034 \begin_layout Bibliography
50035 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50036 LatexCommand bibitem
50043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50045 name "Documentation"
50046 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
50051 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50057 \begin_inset Index idx
50060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50062 packages ! microtpye
50068 \begin_inset Newline newline
50072 \begin_inset Flex URL
50075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50077 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
50085 \begin_layout Bibliography
50086 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50087 LatexCommand bibitem
50094 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50096 name "Documentation"
50097 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50102 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50108 \begin_inset Index idx
50111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50119 \begin_inset Newline newline
50123 \begin_inset Flex URL
50126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50128 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50136 \begin_layout Bibliography
50137 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50138 LatexCommand bibitem
50145 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50147 name "Documentation"
50148 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50153 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50159 \begin_inset Index idx
50162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50164 packages ! prettyref
50170 \begin_inset Newline newline
50174 \begin_inset Flex URL
50177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50179 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50187 \begin_layout Bibliography
50188 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50189 LatexCommand bibitem
50196 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50198 name "Documentation"
50199 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50204 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50210 \begin_inset Index idx
50213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50215 packages ! refstyle
50221 \begin_inset Newline newline
50225 \begin_inset Flex URL
50228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50230 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50238 \begin_layout Bibliography
50239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50240 LatexCommand bibitem
50247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50250 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50255 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50257 \begin_inset Newline newline
50261 \begin_inset Flex URL
50264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50266 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50274 \begin_layout Bibliography
50275 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50276 LatexCommand bibitem
50283 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50286 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50291 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50293 \begin_inset Newline newline
50297 \begin_inset Flex URL
50300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50310 \begin_layout Bibliography
50311 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50312 LatexCommand bibitem
50319 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50322 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50327 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50328 for Cyrillic languages:
50329 \begin_inset Newline newline
50333 \begin_inset Flex URL
50336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50338 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50346 \begin_layout Bibliography
50347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50348 LatexCommand bibitem
50355 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50358 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50363 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50365 \begin_inset Newline newline
50369 \begin_inset Flex URL
50372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50374 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50382 \begin_layout Bibliography
50383 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50384 LatexCommand bibitem
50391 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50394 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50399 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50401 \begin_inset Newline newline
50405 \begin_inset Flex URL
50408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50410 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50418 \begin_layout Bibliography
50419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50420 LatexCommand bibitem
50427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50430 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50435 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50437 \begin_inset Newline newline
50441 \begin_inset Flex URL
50444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50446 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50454 \begin_layout Standard
50455 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50489 \begin_inset Note Note
50492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50499 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50500 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50501 bibliography is the second one:
50509 \begin_layout Standard
50510 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50511 LatexCommand bibtex
50512 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50513 options "biblio/alphadin"
50520 \begin_layout Standard
50521 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50525 \begin_layout Standard
50529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50535 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50544 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50552 \begin_inset Note Note
50555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50556 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50557 \begin_inset space ~
50561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50563 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50575 \begin_layout Standard
50576 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50577 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50583 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50584 LatexCommand printindex